2015 Command Manual PDF

COMAND
Operating Instructions
COMAND Operating Instructions
É1725845800WËÍ
1725845800
Order no. 6515 7871 13 Part no. 172 584 58 00 Edition B-2015
Symbols Publication details
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- Internet
lowing symbols:
G WARNING Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
on the following websites:
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
H Environmental note only)
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal. Editorial office
! Notes on material damage alert you to You are welcome to forward any queries or
dangers that could lead to damage to your suggestions you may have regarding this
vehicle. Operator's Manual to the technical documen-
tation team at the following address:
i Practical tips or further information that Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
could be helpful to you.
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
X This symbol indicates an instruction ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
that must be followed. or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
X Several of these symbols in succes- without written permission from Daimler AG.
sion indicate an instruction with sev-
eral steps.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can Vehicle manufacturer
page) find more information about a topic.
Dis‐ This font indicates a display in the Daimler AG
play multifunction display/COMAND dis- Mercedesstraße 137
play. 70327 Stuttgart
Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro- Germany
tected by copyright © 2005
The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights
reserved.
As at 31.01.2014
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
First, familiarize yourself with your COMAND
system. Read these operating instructions,
particularly the safety and warning notes,
before you drive off.
This will help you to obtain the maximum
pleasure from your COMAND system and to
avoid endangering yourself and others.
The equipment level and functions of your
COMAND system may differ depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
if you have further questions.
The Operator's Manual and all supplements
are integral parts of the vehicle. You should
always keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to
the new owner if you sell the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
1725845800 É1725845800WËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 19
Operating safety ................................. 14 System settings .................................. 41
Vehicle functions ................................ 49
Navigation ........................................... 59
Telephone .......................................... 123
Online and Internet functions .......... 157
Audio .................................................. 185
Video .................................................. 225
Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 235
SIRIUS Weather ................................ 257

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... AUX (audio)

Notes/socket ................................ 223
360° camera Switching to ................................... 223
Displaying images ............................ 56 AUX (video)
Switching on/off .............................. 56 Setting the volume and sound ....... 232
911 emergency call .......................... 125 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 232
Switching to ................................... 232
A AUX jacks
Access data of the mobile phone CD/DVD drive ............................... 238
network provider Avoiding an area ................................ 115
Deleting ......................................... 165
Editing ........................................... 165 B
Making entries ............................... 162 Back button ......................................... 27
Selecting ........................................ 161 Balance, adjusting ............................... 30
Active partition (USB devices only)
Bass, setting ........................................ 30
Selecting ........................................ 202
Bird's-eye view (navigation) ............. 109
Address book
Bluetooth®
Browsing ........................................ 147
Activating audio mode ................... 215
Calling up ....................................... 147
Activating/deactivating ................... 45
Changing an entry .......................... 149
Conditions (telephone) .................. 125
Connecting a call ........................... 150
Connecting another mobile
Creating an entry ........................... 148
phone ............................................ 129
Deleting an entry ........................... 148
Connecting audio devices .............. 212
Deleting contacts ........................... 153
Device list ...................................... 212
Details about an entry ................... 149
Entering the passcode ................... 128
Entering characters ......................... 33
External authorization .................... 129
Entry as a home address ............... 103
General information ......................... 44
Hiding contact details .................... 154
Interface ........................................ 124
Importing contacts ........................ 152
Introduction ................................... 124
Introduction ................................... 146
Reconnecting an audio device ....... 214
Receiving vCards ........................... 153
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 127
Searching for an entry ................... 148
Settings ........................................... 44
Starting route guidance ................. 150
Telephone basic menu ................... 131
Voice tags ...................................... 151
Telephony ...................................... 125
Address entry menu ............................ 64
Telephony notes ............................ 124
Adjusting the sound settings
Bluetooth® audio basic display ....... 215
Balance ............................................ 30
Brightness, setting (TV, video) ......... 226
Alternative Route ................................ 93
Buttons on the COMAND control-
Audio
ler .......................................................... 27
Radio mode ................................... 186
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Switching to (Rear Seat Entertain- C
ment System) ................................ 245 Call
Audio format, setting Accepting/ending/rejecting .......... 132
Video DVD ..................................... 231 see Telephone
Autostore ........................................... 189 Call lists
Displaying details ........................... 141
Index 5
Opening and selecting an entry ..... 140 COMAND

Saving an entry in the address Active multicontour seat .................. 52
book .............................................. 141 Basic functions ................................ 29
Car pool lanes ...................................... 62 Calling up drive status regulator
Category list (music search) ............ 204 (ABC) ............................................... 52
CD Display ............................................. 21
Copy protection ............................. 204 Examples of operation ..................... 27
Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 200 Importing POIs ............................... 171
General information ....................... 204 Menu overview ................................. 22
Inserting ........................................ 196 Multicontour seat ............................ 52
Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Seat functions .................................. 52
Entertainment System) .................. 244 Settings ......................................... 183
Mode, switching to ........................ 197 Switching on/off .............................. 29
Multisession .................................. 203 COMAND and Internet
Notes on discs ............................... 204 see Online and Internet functions
Pause function ............................... 198 COMAND control panel ....................... 25
Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat COMAND controller ............................. 26
Entertainment System) .................. 244 COMAND display
Safety notes .................................. 195 Cleaning instructions ....................... 24
Selecting a media type .................. 198 Setting ............................................. 42
Selecting a track ............................ 199 Switching on/off .............................. 24
Sound settings (balance, bass, Compass function ............................. 117
treble) .............................................. 30 Connecting a USB device ................. 197
CD mode Contacts
Playback options ........................... 202 Deleting ......................................... 153
CD/DVD Importing ....................................... 152
Inserting ........................................ 196 Contrast, setting (TV, video) ............ 226
Removing ....................................... 196 Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... 204
Changing direction Country-specific information (nav-
Announcement phase ...................... 88 igation) ............................................... 118
Change-of-direction phase ............... 88
Preparation phase ............................ 88 D
Changing the character set ................ 36
Channel presets ................................ 188 Data carrier
Characters MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 207
Changing the character set .............. 35 Data medium
Changing the language .................... 34 CD/DVD ........................................ 204
Deleting ........................................... 35 MP3 ............................................... 202
Entering ........................................... 35 Date format, setting ............................ 43
Entering (address book, phone Day design, setting ............................. 42
book) ............................................... 33 Deleting
Entering (navigation) ........................ 35 Call lists ......................................... 142
Moving the cursor ............................ 35 Destination
Switching to letters .......................... 34 Assigning to an address book
Clear button ......................................... 27 entry .............................................. 105
Color, setting (TV, video) .................. 226 Destination (navigation)
Displaying information ..................... 94
Entering a destination by address .... 63
6 Index
Entering a destination using the E

map ................................................. 71
Entering a point of interest .............. 76 Entering a street name ....................... 64
Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 72 Entering an intersection name ........... 67
Entering using Mercedes-Benz Entering the address (example) ......... 63
Apps ................................................ 72 Entering the city .................................. 64
Saving ............................................ 104 Entering the house number ................ 64
Selecting from the destination Entry
memory ........................................... 70 Deleting ........................................... 36
Selecting from the list of last des- Storing ............................................. 34
tinations ........................................... 70 Example display
Selecting storage options .............. 105 Audio CD mode .............................. 198
Storing after destination entry ....... 105 MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 207
Storing during route guidance ....... 105
Destination memory (navigation) F
Deleting an entry ........................... 106 Factory setting (reset function) ......... 47
Entering/saving your home Fast forward
address ............................................ 69
Audio mode (CD, MP3) .................. 200
Previous destinations .................... 107
Video DVD ..................................... 228
Dialing a number (telephone) ........... 132 Fast rewind
DISC button
Audio mode (CD, MP3) .................. 200
Activating audio CD or MP3 mode .. 197 Video DVD ..................................... 228
Activating Bluetooth® Audio ......... 215 Favorites (Internet) ........................... 181
Switching on the Media Interface .. 219
Favorites button .................................. 45
Switching to the MUSIC REGIS-
Frequencies
TER ................................................ 208
Adjusting for radio stations ............ 188
Display
Fuel
Selecting the design ........................ 42
Displaying consumption ................... 50
Displaying the arrival time ................. 94
Displaying the distance to the des-
G
tination ................................................. 94
Displaying the track and album ....... 201 Google™ Local Search
Dolby® Digital ..................................... 31 Importing a destination/route ....... 168
DVD Popular Searches ........................... 169
Copy protection ............................. 204 Search ........................................... 167
Inserting ........................................ 196 Search history ............................... 169
Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Selecting a search position ............ 168
Entertainment System) .................. 244 Using as the destination ................ 168
Notes on discs ............................... 204 GPS reception ...................................... 60
Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat Gracenote® Media Database ........... 200
Entertainment System) .................. 244
Sound settings (balance, bass, H
treble) .............................................. 30
Harman/kardon® Logic 7® sur-
DVD video
round sound system
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 247
see Surround sound (harman/
kardon® surround sound system)
Heading up (navigation) ................... 109
Index 7
Headphones M
Changing batteries ........................ 240
Highway information ........................ 112 Map (navigation)
Home address Adjusting the scale ........................ 108
Entering and storing ........................ 69 Arrival time/distance to the des-
Selecting from the destination tination .......................................... 111
memory ........................................... 70 City model ..................................... 112
Geo-coordinate display .................. 111
Heading ......................................... 109
I
Information in the display .............. 111
Incident (traffic report) ....................... 99 Map settings .................................. 109
Interface (USB, iPod®) Moving ........................................... 108
see Media Interface North orientation ........................... 109
Internet Notes ............................................. 108
Calling up the carousel view .......... 176 Point of interest symbols ............... 110
Conditions for access .................... 158 Road display .................................. 111
Creating favorites .......................... 181 Saving the crosshair position ......... 108
Entering the URL ............................ 176 Showing the map data version ....... 118
Favorites manager ......................... 181 Topographical map ........................ 112
Favorites menu .............................. 181 Updating ........................................ 118
Menu functions .............................. 179 Updating process ........................... 118
Opening favorites .......................... 180 Media Interface
Selecting favorites ......................... 177 Alphabetical track selection .......... 221
Selecting/setting access data ....... 160 Basic menu .................................... 219
Internet radio Connecting an external audio
Calling up ....................................... 175 source ............................................ 218
Searching for stations .................... 175 Connection options ....................... 217
iPod® iPod® ............................................ 217
Alphabetic track selection ............. 221 Mode ............................................. 217
Connecting to the Media Inter- MP3 player .................................... 217
face ............................................... 218 Notes for the MP3 player ............... 223
Selecting a category/playlist ......... 220 Playback options ........................... 222
iTunes® .............................................. 221 Selecting a music file ..................... 219
Selecting category ......................... 220
L Selecting folder ............................. 220
Selecting playlist ............................ 220
Lane recommendations
Switching to ................................... 218
Explanation ...................................... 89 USB mass storage device .............. 217
Presentation .................................... 89 Media list ........................................... 198
List of access data
Microphone, switching on/off ......... 134
New provider ................................. 162
Mobile phone
List of mobile phone network pro-
Authorizing .................................... 128
viders
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
Empty ............................................ 160
face) .............................................. 126
With the selected provider ............. 161
De-authorizing ............................... 130
Lumbar support
External authorization .................... 129
Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 53
Registering (authorizing) ................ 128
8 Index
Mobile phone network providers Entering a destination ...................... 63

Calling up ....................................... 160 Entering a destination by address .... 63
MP3 Entering a destination using the
Bit/sampling rates ......................... 203 map ................................................. 71
Copyright ....................................... 204 Entering a point of interest .............. 76
Data medium ................................. 202 Entering characters (character
Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 200 bar) .................................................. 35
File systems ................................... 202 Entering/saving your home
Formats ......................................... 203 address ............................................ 69
Mode, switching to ........................ 197 Freeway information ...................... 112
Notes ............................................. 202 General notes .................................. 60
Pause function ............................... 198 GPS reception .................................. 60
Playback options ........................... 202 Important safety notes .................... 60
Safety notes .................................. 195 Lane recommendation ..................... 89
Selecting a media type .................. 198 List of areas ................................... 115
Selecting a track ............................ 199 Map settings .................................. 108
Sound settings (balance, bass, Off-road/off-map (off-road desti-
treble) .............................................. 30 nation) ............................................. 97
Multifunction steering wheel Previous destinations .................... 107
Adjusting the volume ....................... 29 Reading out traffic reports ............. 102
Multisession CD ................................ 203 Repeating announcements .............. 91
Music files Route guidance ................................ 87
Importing ....................................... 208 Search & Send ................................. 86
MUSIC REGISTER Selecting a destination from the
Deleting all music files ................... 209 destination memory ......................... 70
Deleting individual music files ....... 210 Selecting a destination from the
General notes ................................ 207 list of last destinations ..................... 70
Memory space info ........................ 210 Selecting your home address ........... 70
Playback options ........................... 211 Setting options for destination/
Switching to ................................... 207 route download .............................. 173
Music search ..................................... 204 Setting route options (avoiding:
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer-
N ries) ................................................. 62
Setting the route type (short
Navigation route, fast route, dynamic route or
Adjusting the volume of the navi- economic route) ............................... 62
gation announcements .................... 29 Showing/hiding the menu ............... 61
Alternative route .............................. 93 Starting route calculation ................ 69
Avoiding an area ............................ 114 Switching announcements on/
Basic settings .................................. 62 off .................................................... 91
Blocking a route section affected Switching to ..................................... 61
by a traffic jam ................................. 92 Navigation announcements
Compass function .......................... 117 Switching off .................................... 29
Destination memory ...................... 103 Night View Assist Plus
Destination/route download ......... 170 Showing the image on the
Displaying destination informa- COMAND display ............................. 56
tion (arrival time, distance to des- Switching automatic activation
tination) ........................................... 94 on/off .............................................. 56
Index 9
North orientation (navigation) ......... 109 Phone call

Dialing ........................................... 132
O Picture settings (TV, video) .............. 226
Picture viewer
Off-map ................................................ 98
Displaying pictures ........................ 233
Online and Internet functions
Introduction ................................... 232
Ending the connection ................... 166 Playback options
Establishing/ending the connec- Audio mode (CD, MP3) .................. 202
tion ................................................ 166 POI (navigation)
Further Mercedes-Benz Apps ......... 174 Category .......................................... 79
Manually setting the access data Defining the position for the POI
of the mobile phone network pro- search .............................................. 78
vider .............................................. 162 Entering ........................................... 76
Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website ..... 174 Entering a point of interest using
Options menu ................................ 172 the map ........................................... 81
Resetting settings .......................... 174 List ................................................... 79
Selecting options for the local ZAGAT® survey service ................... 81
search ............................................ 172 see Personal POIs
Selecting the access data of the POI icons
mobile phone network provider ..... 161 Setting ........................................... 110
Setting options for destination/ POI list
route download .............................. 173 With character bar ........................... 80
Own address ...................................... 103 Previous destinations (navigation) .. 107
P R
Pause function Radio
Audio mode (CD, MP3) .................. 198 Overview ........................................ 186
Video DVD ..................................... 229 Setting a station ............................ 188
Personal POIs
Sound settings (balance, bass,
Acoustic notification ........................ 83 treble) .............................................. 30
Calling up the menu ......................... 82 Storing stations ............................. 188
Displaying on the map ..................... 82 Switching HD Radio on/off ............ 187
Managing categories ........................ 83 Switching on .................................. 186
Saving .............................................. 84 Switching wavebands .................... 187
Selecting as the destination ............. 85 Read-aloud function .......................... 102
Settings ........................................... 82 Reading out
Visual information ............................ 83
Traffic reports on the route ............ 102
Phone book
Real-time traffic reports ..................... 99
Adding a number to an address
Rear Seat Entertainment System
book entry ..................................... 139
Active COMAND source ................. 252
Calling up ....................................... 137
Adjusting sound settings ............... 242
Creating a new entry ..................... 139
Adjusting the brightness ................ 242
Deleting an entry ........................... 138
Adjusting the color ........................ 242
Entering characters ......................... 33
Adjusting the contrast ................... 242
Searching for an entry ................... 137
AUX mode ...................................... 254
Symbol overview ............................ 137
CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 244
Changing the batteries .................. 240
10 Index
Changing the picture format .......... 243 Using the telephone ....................... 124
Cordless headphones .................... 239 Video DVD mode ........................... 226
Multiple users ................................ 242 Satellite radio
Operating with the headphones ..... 241 Displaying information ................... 195
Picture settings .............................. 242 Registering .................................... 191
System settings ............................. 243 Switching to ................................... 191
Using the main loudspeaker .......... 241 SatRadio
Video DVD mode ........................... 247 Notes ............................................. 190
Rear view camera Selecting a category ...................... 192
Displaying the image ........................ 55 Saving the crosshair position .......... 108
Rear-compartment screens .............. 237 Screen
Receiving vCards ............................... 153 Selecting for the remote control .... 237
Redialing (telephone) ........................ 133 SD memory card
Remote control Ejecting .......................................... 196
Button lighting ............................... 238 Inserting ........................................ 196
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 237 Search & Send ...................................... 86
Reset function ..................................... 47 Seats
Resetting (factory settings) ............... 47 Active multicontour seat .................. 52
Route Adjusting the lumbar support
Estimated time of arrival .................. 94 (COMAND) ....................................... 53
Route (navigation) Balance (seat heating) ..................... 54
Calling up the "Routes" menu .......... 96 Multicontour seat ............................ 52
Displaying the distance to the des- Resetting settings ............................ 55
tination ............................................ 94 Seat functions (COMAND) ............... 52
Recording ........................................ 95 Selecting for adjustment
Route overview ................................ 94 (COMAND) ....................................... 52
Selecting an alternative route .......... 93 Selecting a province ........................... 64
Setting route options (avoiding: Selecting a state .................................. 64
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer- Selecting stations
ries) ................................................. 62 Radio ............................................. 188
Setting the route type (short Sending DTMF tones ......................... 134
route, fast route, dynamic route or Setting the audio format
economic route) ............................... 62 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 251
Starting calculation .......................... 69 Setting the language
Route demonstration .......................... 95 COMAND ......................................... 45
Route guidance Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 251
Canceling ......................................... 92 Setting the night design ..................... 42
Continuing ....................................... 92 Setting the text reader speed ............ 44
Destination reached ......................... 92 Setting the volume
General notes .................................. 87 Telephone calls ................................ 30
Lane recommendations ................... 89 Video AUX ..................................... 232
Off-road ........................................... 97 Settings
Traffic reports .................................. 99 Menu overview ................................. 22
Picture (COMAND) ......................... 226
S Sound settings ................................. 30
SIRIUS weather display
Safety notes
5-day forecast ................................ 259
Audio CD and MP3 mode ............... 195
Index 11
Daily forecast ................................. 258 T

Detail information .......................... 259
Information chart ........................... 258 Telephone
Selecting a location for the Accepting/ending a call ................ 132
weather forecast ............................ 259 Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 30
Switching on/off ........................... 258 Calling (outgoing call) .................... 132
Weather map ................................. 262 Calling via speed dial ..................... 133
Sound Conference connection .................. 135
Switching on/off .............................. 29 Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
Sound menu ......................................... 30 eral information) ............................ 126
Sound mode ......................................... 32 De-authorizing a mobile phone ...... 130
Sound settings Ending an active call ...................... 135
Entering a number ......................... 132
Calling up the sound menu .............. 30
Entering phone numbers ................ 132
Surround sound ............................... 31
External authorization (Blue-
Treble and bass ............................... 30
Speed dial list tooth®) .......................................... 129
Function restrictions ...................... 125
Saving a phone book entry ............ 142
General notes ................................ 124
SPLITVIEW ............................................ 37
Incoming call ................................. 132
Station search ................................... 188
Making a call ................................. 135
Stop function
Operating options .......................... 124
Video DVD ..................................... 229
Overview of functions .................... 133
Storing stations
Reception and transmission vol-
Radio ............................................. 188
ume ............................................... 131
Street View .......................................... 73
Redialing ........................................ 133
Surround sound ................................... 31 Rejecting a call .............................. 132
Surround sound (harman/ Rejecting/accepting a waiting
kardon® surround sound system) call ................................................. 134
Notes ............................................... 31 Safety notes .................................. 124
Switching on/off .............................. 31 Sending DTMF tones ...................... 134
Switching between picture for- Single call ...................................... 133
mats (TV, video) ................................. 226 Switching hands-free microphone
Switching between summer time on/off ............................................ 134
and standard time ............................... 43 Text messages (SMS) .................... 144
Switching HD Radio on/off Toggling ......................................... 135
see Radio Using the telephone ....................... 132
Switching the hands-free micro- see Bluetooth®
phone on/off ..................................... 134 Telephone basic menu
Switching wavebands (radio) ........... 187 Bluetooth® interface ..................... 131
System settings Telephone number
Bluetooth® ...................................... 44 Entering ......................................... 132
Date ................................................. 42 Text messages (SMS)
Language ......................................... 45 Calling the sender .......................... 145
Text reader speed ............................ 44 Deleting ......................................... 146
Time ................................................. 42 Inbox .............................................. 144
Time zone ........................................ 43 Information and requirements ....... 144
Voice Control System ...................... 44 Reading .......................................... 144
Reading aloud ................................ 145
12 Index
Storing sender in address book ..... 146 Function restrictions ...................... 227
Storing the sender as a new Interactive content ........................ 231
address book entry ........................ 146 Notes on discs ............................... 227
Time Operation ....................................... 226
Setting ............................................. 44 Pause function ............................... 229
Setting summer/standard time ....... 43 Playing conditions .......................... 227
Setting the format ............................ 43 Safety notes .................................. 226
Setting the time ............................... 42 Selecting ........................................ 230
Setting the time manually ................ 42 Selecting a film/title ...................... 229
Setting the time zone ....................... 43 Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 229
Setting the time/date format .......... 43 Setting the audio format ................ 231
Tone settings Setting the language ...................... 231
Balance and fader ............................ 30 Setting the picture ......................... 226
Track Showing/hiding the control
Selecting (CD, MP3) ....................... 199 menu ............................................. 228
Selecting using the number key- Showing/hiding the menu ............. 228
pad ................................................ 199 Stop function ................................. 229
Track information .............................. 247 Subtitles ........................................ 231
Traffic jam function ............................. 92 Switching to ................................... 227
Traffic reports Voice Control System
Calling up a list .............................. 100 Settings ........................................... 44
Real-time traffic report .................. 101 Volume, adjusting
Treble, adjusting (sound) .................... 30 COMAND ......................................... 29
True Image™ ........................................ 32 Navigation messages ....................... 29
TV
Automatic picture shutoff .............. 226 W
Picture settings .............................. 226 Way points
Sound settings (balance, bass, Accepting for the route .................... 76
treble) .............................................. 30 Creating ........................................... 73
Editing .............................................. 75
U Entering ........................................... 73
Updating the digital map .................. 118 Searching for a gas station when
USB the fuel level is low .......................... 76
see Media Interface Weather Band
Searching for a channel ................. 189
V Switching on .................................. 189
Weather map (SIRIUS)
Vehicle Activating/deactivating display
Data acquisition ............................... 15 levels ............................................. 263
Video Calling up ....................................... 262
see Video DVD Legend ........................................... 267
Video AUX Moving ........................................... 262
Setting the picture ......................... 226 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 262
Video DVD Time stamp .................................... 267
Automatic picture shutoff .............. 226 Weather memory (SIRIUS)
DVD menu ..................................... 230 Selecting an area ........................... 261
Fast forward/rewind ...................... 228 Storing an area .............................. 261
Index 13
Website
Adding to favorites ........................ 180
Z
ZAGAT® rating service ........................ 81
14 Operating safety
Important safety notes Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
Rnarrow bridges
G WARNING COMAND can give incorrect navigation com-
Modifications to electronic components, their mands if the actual street/traffic situation
software as well as wiring can impair their does not correspond with the digital map's
function and/or the function of other net- data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor
worked components. In particular, systems all routes in an area. For example, a route may
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a have been diverted or the direction of a one-
result, these may no longer function as inten- way street may have changed.
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of For this reason, you must always observe
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an road and traffic rules and regulations during
accident and injury. your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- ulations always have priority over the sys-
tronic components or their software. You tem's driving recommendations.
should have all work to electrical and elec- Navigation announcements are intended to
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified direct you while driving without diverting your
specialist workshop. attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- sulting the map display for directions. Look-
tronics, the general operating permit is ren- ing at the icons or map display can distract
dered invalid. you from traffic conditions and driving, and
G WARNING increase the risk of an accident.
If you operate information systems and com- Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers
cle while driving, you will be distracted from a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
traffic conditions. You could also lose control per second.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
Only operate the equipment when the traffic exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
situation permits. If you are not sure that this equipment and meets the FCC radio fre-
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple-
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment C to OET65.
ment when the vehicle is stationary. This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that is deemed to comply without
You must observe the legal requirements for maximum permissive exposure evaluation
the country in which you are currently driving (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be
when operating COMAND. installed and operated with at least 8 inches
COMAND calculates the route to the destina- (20 cm) and more between the radiator and a
tion without taking account of the following, person's body (excluding extremities: hands,
for example: wrists, feet and legs.)
Rtraffic
lights
Rstop and yield signs
Rmerging lanes
Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no
stopping zone
Operating safety 15
Declarations of conformity i Roof antenna functionality (telephone,

satellite radio, GPS) can be affected by the
Vehicle components which receive use of roof carrier systems.
and/or transmit radio waves
Attaching metalized retrofit film to the
i USA only: The wireless devices of this windshield may affect radio reception and
vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC have a negative impact on all other anten-
Rules. Operation is subject to the following nas (e.g. emergency antenna) in the vehicle
two conditions: interior.
1) These devices may not cause interfer- i Therefore, have all work on or modifica-
ence, and tions to electronic components carried out
2) These devices must accept any interfer- at a qualified specialist workshop. This
ence, including interference that may workshop should have the necessary spe-
cause undesired operation of the device. cialist knowledge and tools to carry out the
Changes or modifications not expressly work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
approved by the party responsible for com- mends that you use an authorized
pliance could void the user's authority to Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In
operate the equipment. particular, work relevant to safety or on
safety-related systems must be carried out
i Canada only: The wireless devices of this at a qualified specialist workshop.
vehicle comply with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation i Protection against theft: this device is
is subject to the following two conditions: equipped with technical provisions to pro-
1) These devices may not cause interfer- tect it against theft. Further information on
ence, and protection against theft can be obtained
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
2) These devices must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device. Data stored in the vehicle
A wide range of electronic components in

Correct use
your vehicle contain data memories.
Observe the following information when using These data memories temporarily or perma-
COMAND: nently store technical information about:
RThe vehicle's operating state
Rthe safety notes in this manual
RIncidents
Rtraffic rules and regulations
RMalfunctions
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles In general, this technical information docu-
ments the state of a component, a module, a
i Work improperly carried out on electronic system or the surroundings.
components or systems (e.g. radio, DVD
These include, for example:
changer) and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Even sys- Roperating conditions of system compo-
tems that have not been modified could be nents, e.g. fluid levels
affected because the electronic systems Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of
are connected. Electronic malfunctions its individual components, e.g. number of
can seriously jeopardize the operational wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in
safety of your vehicle.
Z
16 Operating safety
movement, lateral acceleration, accelera- Further additional functions that have been
tor pedal position contractually agreed upon with the customer
Rmalfunctions and defects in important sys- allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by
tem components, e.g. lights, brakes the vehicle as well. The additional functions
Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions include, for example, vehicle location in case
in special driving situations, e.g. air bag of an emergency.
deployment, intervention of stability con-
trol systems
Qualified specialist workshop
Rambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera-
ture
Read the information on qualified specialist
This data is of an exclusively technical nature workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
and can be used to:
Rassist in recognizing and rectifying mal-
functions and defects Information on copyright
Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
General information
dent
Roptimize vehicle function Information on licenses for free and Open
Source software used in your vehicle and in
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
the electronic components can be found on
movements.
this website: http://www.mercedes-
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- benz.com/opensource.
mation can be read from the event data mem-
ory and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example: Registered trademarks
Rrepair services Registered trademarks:
Rservice processes
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Rwarranties
Bluetooth® SIG Inc.
Rquality assurance
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
It is read by employees of the service network RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
(including manufacturers) using special diag-
of DOLBY Laboratories.
nostic devices. More detailed information is
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
obtained from it, if required.
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
After a malfunction has been rectified, the
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
information is deleted from the malfunction
memory or is continually overwritten. Prince.
When operating the vehicle, situations are RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-
conceivable in which this technical data, in marks of Apple Inc.
connection with other information (if neces- RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-
sary, under consultation with an authorized man International Industries.
expert), could be traced to a person. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-
Examples include: istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-
Raccident reports tion.
Rdamage to the vehicle RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
Rwitness statements XM Radio Inc.

Operating safety 17
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
Your COMAND equipment
This manual describes all standard and

optional equipment available for your
COMAND system at the time of purchase.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your COMAND system may
not be equipped with all the features descri-
bed. This also applies to safety-relevant sys-
tems and functions. Therefore, the equip-
ment on your COMAND system may differ
from that in the descriptions and illustrations.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some COMAND functions

are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle
is in motion. You will notice this, for example
because either you will not be able to select
certain menu items or COMAND will display a
message to this effect.
Z
18
19
Your COMAND equipment .................. 20

COMAND operating system ............... 20
Using COMAND ................................... 28
At a glance
Basic COMAND functions ................... 29
Character entry (telephony) ............... 33
Character entry (navigation) .............. 35
SPLITVIEW ........................................... 37
20 COMAND operating system
Your COMAND equipment You can call up the main functions:

Rusing the corresponding buttons
These operating instructions describe all the Rusing the main function bar in the COMAND
At a glance
standard and optional equipment for your display

COMAND system, as available at the time of
Rusing the remote control
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND system may not be equipped with
all the features described.
COMAND operating system

Overview
: COMAND display (Y page 21)

; COMAND control panel with a single DVD
drive
= COMAND controller (Y page 26)
You can use COMAND to operate the follow-
ing main functions:
Rthe navigation system
Rthe audio function
Rthe telephone function
Rthe video function
Rthe system settings
Rthe online and Internet functions
Rthe Digital Operator's Manual
(available depending on the vehicle model)
COMAND operating system 21
COMAND display
Display overview
At a glance
Example display for radio
: Status bar
; Calls up the audio menu
= Main function bar
? Display/selection window
A Radio menu bar
Status bar : displays the time, the current mobile phone network provider and the signal
level.
The main functions – navigation, audio, telephone and video – feature additional menus. This
is indicated by triangle ;. The following table lists the available menu items.
Main function bar = allows you to call up the desired main function. When the main function
is activated, it is identifiable by the white lettering.
In the example, the radio mode is switched on within the audio main function, display/selec-
tion window ? is active.
Menu bar A allows you to operate the radio functions.
Menu overview
Navi Audio Telephone Video System Symbol ®

At a glance
Route settings FM/AM Telephone Video DVD Calls up the Calls up the
radio (using system Digital
HD Radio™) menu Operator's
Manual
(available
depending
on the vehi-
cle model)
Map settings Satellite Address AUX Calls up
radio book COMAND
and Internet
Personal POIs Disc Calls up the
weather
service SIR-
IUS
Weather
Messages Memory Calls up the
(street name card Mercedes-
announcements, Benz Mobile
acoustic informa- website
tion during calls,
audio fadeout,
reserve fuel level)
O Activates/ MUSIC
deactivates alter- REGISTER
native routes
Avoids an area USB stor-
age device
SIRIUS service Bluetooth
Audio
Map version Media Inter-
face
AUX
System menu overview
System Time SPLITVIEW Consump- Seat Display off
At a glance
tion
Display settings O Operates Calls up the Changes Switches
Switches COMAND fuel con- the driver/ off the dis-
the auto- functions sumption front- play
matic time from the display passenger
settings passenger seat set-
on/off side tings
Text reader speed Sets the
time zone
Voice-operated Switches to
control settings summer
time
Rear view camera Manual
time setting
Language Sets the
time/date
format
Favorites button
Activates/deacti-
vates Bluetooth®
Automatic volume
adjustment
Imports/exports
data
Resets COMAND
i Delete your
personal data
using this func-
tion, for example
before selling
your vehicle.
If equipped with the rear view camera: when the function is activated and COMAND is
switched on, the image from the rear view camera is automatically shown in the COMAND
display when reverse gear is engaged.
i If the 360° Camera menu item is displayed, Display Off can be called up under System
System.
Switching the COMAND display on/off

X Press the W button.
At a glance
or
X Select System in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
In both cases, the system menu appears.
X To switch off: select Display Off and
press W to confirm.
X To switch on: press one of the buttons,
e.g. W, Ø or the % back button.
Cleaning instructions
! Do not touch the display. The display has
a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is
a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean
the display screen, when necessary, with a
commercially available microfiber cloth and
cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible
damage. Then, dry the surface with a dry
microfiber cloth.
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or
abrasive cleaning agents. These could dam-
age the display surface.
COMAND control panel
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Switches to radio mode 186 B Selects stations via the sta-
Switches wavebands 187 tion search function 188
Switches to satellite radio 191 Rewinds 200
Selects the previous track 199
; Switches to navigation
mode 61 C Disc slot
Shows the menu system 61 • To insert CDs/DVDs 196
= Press h repeatedly • To remove CDs/DVDs 196
• Switches to audio CD and • Updates the digital map 118
MP3 mode 197 D Selects stations via the sta-
• Switches to memory card tion search function 188
mode 197 Fast forward 200
• Switches to MUSIC REG- Selects the next track 199
ISTER 207
• Switches to USB storage E Clear button
device mode 197 • Deletes characters 36
• Switches to Media Inter- • Deletes an entry 36
face or audio AUX mode 218
• Switches to Bluetooth®
audio mode 215
? Calls up the telephone
basic menu:
• Telephony via the Blue-
tooth® interface 131
A Load/eject button 196
Function Page Function Page

F Number pad H SD memory card slot 196
At a glance
• Selects stations via the I Calls up the system menu 42

station presets 188
• Stores stations manually 188 J Accepts a call 132
• Mobile phone authoriza- Dials a number 132
tion 128 Redial 133
• Telephone number entry 132 Accepts a waiting call 134
• Sends DTMF tones 134 K Switches the sound on or
• Character entry 35 off 29
• Selects a location for the Switches the microphone
weather forecast from the on/off 134
memory 261 Cancels the text message
z Displays the current read-aloud function 145
track being played 201 Switches off navigation
g Selects stations by announcements 29
entering the frequency
manually 188 L Rejects a call 132
g Selects a track 199 Ends an active call 135
Rejects a waiting call 134
G Switches COMAND on/off 29
Adjusts the volume 29
COMAND controller You can:

Rcall up menus or lists
Overview
Rscroll within menus or lists and
Rexit menus or lists
Operation
: COMAND controller
You can use the COMAND controller to select
the menu items in the COMAND display.
Example: operating the COMAND controller
The COMAND controller can be: Back button

Rpressed briefly or pressed and held W You can use the k button to exit a menu or
Rturned clockwise or counter-clockwise to call up the basic display of the current
At a glance
cVd operating mode.
Rslid left or right XVY X To exit the menu: briefly press the k
Rslid forwards or backwards ZVÆ back button.
Rslid diagonally aVb COMAND changes to the next higher menu
level in the current operating mode.
Example of operation X To call up the basic display: press and
hold the k back button.
In the instructions, operating sequences are COMAND changes to the basic display of
described as follows: the current operating mode.
X Press the $ button.
Radio mode is activated. Clear button
X Select Radio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W
X To delete individual characters: briefly
to confirm. press the 2 clear button.
X To delete an entire entry: press and hold
X Confirm Station List by pressing W.
The station list appears. the 2 clear button.
Seat function button

Buttons on the COMAND controller You can use the T button to call up the
Overview following seat functions:
RMulticontour seat (with 4-way lumbar sup-
port)
RActive multicontour seat (dynamic seat and
massage function)
RBalance (seat heating distribution)
Favorites button
You can assign predefined functions to
the ; favorites button and call them up by
pressing the button (Y page 45).
: Back button (Y page 27)
; Clear button (Y page 27)
= Seat function button (Y page 52)
? Favorites button (Y page 45)
If your vehicle does not have the seat function
button, it will have two Favorites buttons.
For AMG vehicles: the COMAND controller is
configured with the : and ; buttons.
28 Using COMAND
Using COMAND Selecting the menu of a main function

Selecting a main function
At a glance
Address entry menu

: Main function bar
Situation: switching from navigation mode
(address entry menu) to the system settings.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Destination by sliding V Æ and Example display for audio CD mode and audio
turning c V d the COMAND controller and menu (below)
press W to confirm. : Calls up the audio menu
X Select Address Entry and press W to If one of the navigation, audio, telephone or
confirm. video main functions is switched on, trian-
The address entry menu appears. gle : appears next to the entry in the main
function bar. You can now select an associ-
X Slide Z V the COMAND controller and
ated menu.
switch to main function bar :.
The example describes how to call up the
X Select System in the main function bar by
audio menu from audio CD mode (an audio
turning c V d the COMAND controller and
CD is playing).
press W to confirm.
The system menu appears. X Select Audio in the main function bar by
The Audio menu appears.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
audio mode.
X Select another audio mode, e.g. Radio
Radio, by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Radio mode is activated.
Basic COMAND functions 29
Selecting a menu item Switching off navigation announce-

ments
Navigation announcements: press the
At a glance
X
8 button during the announcement.
Switching navigation announcements

back on
X Press the 8 button again.
The navigation announcements are active
again:
RifCOMAND is switched off/on with the
X Select the station by turning c V d the q control knob
COMAND controller and press W to con- Ror after starting route guidance
firm.
The station is set.
Adjusting the volume
Basic COMAND functions Adjusting the volume for the audio or
video source
Switching COMAND on/off
X Turn the q control knob.
X Press the q control knob.
When you switch on COMAND, a warning or
message will appear. COMAND calls up the X Press the W or X button on the mul-
previously selected menu. tifunction steering wheel.
If you switch off COMAND, playback of the The volume of the currently selected audio
current audio or video source will also be or video source changes.
switched off. You can also adjust the volume for the fol-
lowing:
RNavigation announcements
Switching the sound on or off RPhone calls
Audio/video source sound RVoice output of the Voice Control System
(see the separate operating instructions)
XPress the 8 button on the COMAND
controller or on the multifunction steering
Adjusting the volume for navigation
wheel.
announcements
The sound from the respective audio or
video source is switched on or off. During a navigation announcement:
i When the sound is switched off, you will X Turn the q control knob.
see the , symbol in the status bar. If you or
change the audio or video source or change
the volume, the sound is automatically
X Press the W or X button on the mul-
switched on. tifunction steering wheel.
i Even if the sound is switched off, you will

still hear navigation system announce-
ments.
30 Basic COMAND functions
Adjusting the volume for phone calls Adjusting treble and bass
You can adjust the volume for hands-free
mode during a telephone call.
At a glance
X Turn the q control knob.

or
X Press the W or X button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel.
Adjusting the sound settings

Calling up the sound menu Setting the bass
X Select Treble or Bass in the sound menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
The setting is saved.
Adjusting balance and fader

You can make various sound settings for the
different audio and video sources. This means
that it is possible to set more bass for radio
mode than for audio CD mode, for example.
You can call up the respective sound menu
from the menu of the desired mode.
The example describes how to call up the
sound menu in radio mode.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband.
Setting the balance
X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
With the balance function, you can control
whether the sound is louder on the driver's or
to confirm.
front-passenger side.
You can now set the treble, bass and bal-
ance for radio mode. The fader function is used to control whether
the sound is louder in the front or the rear of
the vehicle.
You can adjust the fader depending on the
vehicle model.
Basic COMAND functions 31
Equipped with Bang & Olufsen sound sys-

tem: for the best sound focus, choose the
setting 0.
At a glance
X Select Bal/Fad (balance/fader) in the
sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND
X Select a balance setting by sliding XVY the
firm.
Surround
General notes
If your vehicle is equipped with surround
sound, you can use one of two sound sys-
tems:
Rharman/kardon® Logic 7® surround sound
system
The harman/kardon®Logic 7® surround
sound system allows you to set the opti-
harman/kardon® Logic 7® surround
mum surround sound in the vehicle interior
sound system
(Y page 31).
RBang & Olufsen sound system
(Y page 32)
Both sound systems are available for the fol-
lowing operating modes:
Rradio (FM only)
Rsatellite radio
Raudio CD
RMP3 (including SD memory card and USB
storage device)
RMedia Interface
RBluetooth® audio mode
Rvideo DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digital
audio formats)
RAUX
Because some DVDs contain both stereo and
multichannel audio formats, it may be neces-
sary to set the audio format (Y page 231).
Discs which support the audio formats men-
tioned have the following logos:
32 Basic COMAND functions
The example describes how to set the sur- multichannel audio formats, such as MLP,
round sound for radio mode. dts or Dolby Digital. This results in sound
X To switch surround sound on/off: press characteristics like those intended by the
At a glance
the $ button. sound engineer when the original was

The radio display appears. You will hear the recorded.
last station played on the last waveband. i If you select Logic7® Off
Off, the sound sys-
X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning tem plays the tracks as stored on the
cVd the COMAND controller and press W medium. Due to the design of the
to confirm. passenger compartment, an optimum
audio experience cannot be guaranteed for
X Select Surround and press W to confirm.
all passengers.
X Select Logic7® On or Logic7® Off by turn-
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press Bang & Olufsen sound system
W to confirm.
Depending on your selection, surround
sound is switched on or off and the menu is
exited.
X To exit the menu without saving: press
the k back button or slide XVY the
COMAND controller.
i Please note the following: for the opti-
mum audio experience for all passengers
when Logic7® is switched on, the balance
should be set to the center of the vehicle
interior. You can optimize the sound in the vehicle with
You will achieve the best sound results by the Bang & Olufsen sound system and the
playing video DVD media. True Image
Image™ sound technology. The Sound
MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least Mode function enables you to focus the selec-
128 kbit/s. ted sound setting within the vehicle.
Surround sound playback does not func- The example describes how to set the opti-
tion for mono signal sources, such as for mum sound for radio mode.
AM radio mode. Selecting the sound setting for True
If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel, Image™
you should switch off Logic7®, since it may X Press a number key, such as $.
otherwise switch dynamically between X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
stereo and mono and cause temporary cVd the COMAND controller and press W
sound distortions. to confirm.
On some stereo recordings, the sound X Select Bang&Olufsen and press W to con-
characteristics may differ from conven- firm.
tional stereo playback. A menu appears. A # dot marks the current
i The Logic7® On function creates a sur- setting for True Image™.
round sound experience for every X Select reference or surround and press
passenger when playing stereo recordings, W to confirm.
for example. It enables optimum playback Rreference
of music and films on CD or video DVD with
Character entry (telephony) 33
This setting provides a crisp, clear, luxury i Please note the following: you will achieve
high-end sound setting for a studio atmos- the best sound results on your Bang & Oluf-
phere in your vehicle. sen sound system by playing high-quality
At a glance
Rsurround CDs.
This setting enables a wide-ranging sound MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least
experience for playing music and videos. 224 kbit/s.
When playing using an iPod®, the bit rate
should also be at least 224 kbit/s.
For optimum playback quality:
X Deactivate the “EQ” setting on the
iPod®.
Surround-sound playback does not func-
tion for mono signal sources, such as the
medium wave range (MW) in radio mode.
On some stereo recordings, the sound
characteristics may differ from conven-
: Current position of the sound setting tional stereo playback.
For the optimum musical enjoyment, you can
focus the sound image precisely on one seat.
This means you are right at the center of the Character entry (telephony)
listening experience, with all system param-
Example: entering characters
eters being precisely calculated for the selec-
ted position. The result is authentic music
reproduction inside the vehicle.
Focusing the sound setting
X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
to confirm.
X Select Bang&Olufsen and press W to con-
firm.
A menu appears. A # dot marks the current
setting for Sound Mode. : * Switches the character bar to upper-
case/lowercase letters
Depending on the vehicle model series ; p Switches the character bar from
X Select left
left, all or rear and press W to uppercase/lowercase letters to dig-
confirm. its
or = B Changes the language of the char-
X Select left
left, all or right and press W to acter bar
confirm. ? 2 Deletes a character/an entry
X To exit the menu: press the k back The example describes how to enter the sur-
button or slide XVY the COMAND control- name “Schulz”.
ler.
34 Character entry (telephony)
X Call up the input menu with data fields Option 1

(Y page 139). X Select 4 or 5 in the character bar and
X Select S and confirm W with the COMAND press W to confirm.
At a glance
controller. The input menu shows the data field selec-

S appears in the data field. ted.
X Select c and confirm W with the COMAND
Option 2
controller.
The letter c is added to S in the data field. X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeat-
X Repeat the process until the name has
edly until the character bar disappears.
been entered in full. X Select the data field by sliding ZVÆ and
Other input menu functions: press W to confirm.

RDeleting a character/an entry
(Y page 35) Storing the entry
RSwitching between upper/lower-case let-
ters (Y page 34) X After making an entry in the input
menu, e.g. to create a new
RChanging the character set (Y page 35)
entry(Y page 139): select the ¬ sym-
RMoving the cursor to the next data field
bol in the character bar by turning cVd the
(Y page 35) COMAND controller and press W to con-
X To enter a phone number: select the dig- firm.
its one by one in the corresponding data The entry is stored in the address book.
field by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
firm. Further functions available in the
character bar
Switching data fields Changing the language of the character

bar
While making an entry in the input menu
(Y page 139):
X Select B and press W to confirm.
X Select a language by turning cVd the

firm.
Switching the character bar to letters

While making an entry in the input menu, e.g.
: Cursor in the next data field
to create a new entry (Y page 139):
; Stores the entry
X Select the * (upper case) or E
= 4 and 5 symbols to select a data field
(lower case) symbol and press W to con-
In the input menu, if you want to enter a first firm.
name after you have entered a surname, for
example, proceed as follows to switch
between the data fields:
Character entry (navigation) 35
Changing the character set X To delete an entry: press and hold the
$ button on the control panel until the
While making an entry in the input menu
entire entry has been deleted.
(Y page 139):
At a glance
or
X Select the p symbol and press W to
confirm. X Select the 2 symbol and press and hold
W the COMAND controller until the entire
RABC (upper/lower case)
entry has been deleted.
R123 (digits)
or
ROther (special characters such as @, €,
X Press and hold the 2 button next to the
etc.) COMAND controller until the entire entry is
deleted.
Moving the cursor to the next data field
Character entry (navigation)

General information
The following paragraphs describe how to
enter characters using city input for NEW
YORK as an example.
If you want to use the address entry menu to
enter a city, a street or a house number, for
example, COMAND offers you:
: Cursor (repositioned) Ra list with a character bar (option 1)
; 2 and 3 symbol to reposition the cur- Ra selection list (option 2)
sor You can enter the characters using either the
While making an entry in the input menu character bar or the number keypad. In the
(Y page 139): selection list, you select an entry to copy it to
the address entry menu.
X Select the 2 or 3 symbol and press W to
confirm.
Option 1: city list/street list with
Deleting a character/an entry character bar
While making an entry in the input menu X Call up the city list with character bar
(Y page 139): (Y page 64).
The alphabetically sorted city list shows the
X To delete characters: press the $ but-
first available entries.
ton on the control panel.
or
X Select the 2 symbol by sliding VÆ and
press W to confirm.
or
X Press the 2 button next to the
COMAND controller.
36
At a glance Character entry (navigation)
: Character N entered by the user X Select E, W, space, Y in order and confirm

; Characters automatically added by each with W.
COMAND ANTICOKE
Entering characters using the number
= List entry that most closely resembles the keypad
current entry by the user
? Switches to the selection list X To enter the letter N: press the p num-
ber key twice in quick succession.
A Deletes an entry
The character appears at the bottom of the
B Characters not currently available display when the key is pressed. The first
C Characters currently available available letter is highlighted.
D Currently selected character You see which characters you can enter
E Character bar with that key. Each time the key is pressed,
F Cancels an entry the next character is selected.
G List Example: p key:
Entering characters using the character Rpress once = M
bar Rpress twice = N
X Select N by turning c V d the COMAND Rpress three times = O
X Wait until the character display goes out.
List G shows all available city names
The entries matching your input are shown
beginning with N. The list entry most closely
in the list.
resembling user's current entry = is
always highlighted at the top of the list XEnter E, W, space, Y with the corresponding
(NANTICOKE
NANTICOKE in the example). keys.
All characters currently entered by the user i The space is entered using number key
are shown in black (letter N : in the exam- 9.
ple). Letters added by COMAND are shown
in gray ; (ANTICOKE
ANTICOKE in the example).
Character bar E shows the letters still Further functions in the list with char-
available for selection in black C. These acter bar
can be selected. In the example, the letter O X To delete characters: press the $ but-
is highlighted D. The characters available ton on the control panel.
depend on the entry made by the user so far
or
and the data contained in the digital map.
Characters that are no longer available B X Press the 2 button next to the
are shown in gray. COMAND controller.
SPLITVIEW 37
or If there are several entries for a city or if sev-

X Select the 2 symbol in the character bar eral cities of the same name are stored, then
by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the ¬ is highlighted in the character bar.
At a glance
COMAND controller and press W to con- X Press W the COMAND controller.
firm.
X To delete an entry: press and hold the
$ button on the control panel. Option 2: city list as selection list
or
X Press and hold the 2 button next to the
COMAND controller until the entire entry is
deleted.
or
X Select the 2 symbol in the character bar
and press and hold W the COMAND con-
troller until the entire entry is deleted.
X To cancel an entry: select the & symbol
in the bottom left of the character bar and
press W to confirm. COMAND either shows the selection list auto-
or matically or you can call up the selection list
X Press the k back button. from the list with the character bar.
The address entry menu appears. The example shows the selection list after the
city NEW YORK has been entered. The entry is
X To accept the first list entry: press and
highlighted automatically.
hold W the COMAND controller until the
X Confirm NEW YORK by pressing W the
address entry menu appears.
The accepted list entry is shown there. COMAND controller.
The address entry menu appears. You can
now enter a street, for example.
Calling up the list as a selection list Observe the information on destination entry
(Y page 63).
You can switch from the list of cities with the
character bar to the list of cities as a selection
list at any point during character entry. SPLITVIEW
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeat-
edly until the city list appears as a selection Method of operation
list. SPLITVIEW allows you to simultaneously use
Select the desired city from the selection different COMAND functions on the front-
list. passenger side and on the driver's side. Dif-
or ferent content is seen depending on your per-
X Select¬in the character bar by turning spective when viewing the display.
cVd the COMAND controller and press W The "Navi" function, for example, can be used
to confirm. from the driver's side while a video is watched
from the front-passenger side.
SPLITVIEW is operated with the remote con-
trol from the front-passenger side.
38 SPLITVIEW
To do so, use the special cordless head- Switching SPLITVIEW on/off

phones (Y page 239). Using the headphones
on the correct sides ensures an optimal
At a glance
sound.
You can connect your own headphones to a
special headphones jack. You can use the
remote control to operate them.
Points to remember
RYou can only adjust the volume for the
headphones supplied, directly on the head-
phones. Switching on SPLITVIEW
ROnly entertainment functions, i.e. audio, X Select System in the main function bar by
TV, video and Internet, for example, may be turning c V d the COMAND controller and
used with SPLITVIEW. press W to confirm.
RDifferent media can be used on the driver X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm.
and front-passenger sides as long as they SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the dis-
use different media sources. Example: if a play and display ; switches to OffOff.
medium from the single DVD drive is being The front passenger sees the display of the
played on the driver's side, then another function last activated. If the switch-on
medium that is also played from the single time was longer than 30 minutes previ-
DVD drive cannot be played separately on ously, the display from the driver's side is
the front-passenger side. However, other shown.
media can be used at the same time on the
The front passenger can now call up the
front-passenger side, including radio,
COMAND functions with the remote con-
memory card, MUSIC REGISTER, Media
trol.
Interface, USB or AUX.
RIf you use the same medium on both sides, Switching off SPLITVIEW
you can both carry out the respective set- X Select ; in the menu bar by turning cVd
tings. the COMAND controller and press W to
RInternet use is only available at any one confirm.
time to the driver or the front passenger. SPLITVIEW symbol : disappears from the
A corresponding message appears on the display. Display ; switches to On
On.
display.
RInternet can only be used, if it is set and
i If COMAND has already been switched
on, you can also use the remote control to
connected via a telephone on the driver's
switch SPLITVIEW on and off. Make sure
side.
that the SPLITVIEW symbol is set on the
RThe multifunction steering wheel can only
remote control thumbwheel (Y page 237).
be used for functions which relate to the
driver's side. The SPLITVIEW display remains on for approx-
imately 30 minutes after the SmartKey has
been turned to position 0 in the ignition lock.
After this time or after the SmartKey has been
removed, the settings on the front-passenger
side are saved for approximately 30 minutes
SPLITVIEW 39
longer. After this period, reactivation on the Transferring a destination to the

front-passenger side means that the settings driver
from the driver's side will be used.
Using SPLITVIEW you can select a destination
At a glance
from the front-passenger side and transfer
Transferring the driver's website this to the driver's side.
X To switch on SPLITVIEW: select Settings
X To switch on SPLITVIEW: select System
from the main function bar by turning cVd
from the main function bar by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
confirm.
X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm.
X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm.
SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the dis-
SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the dis-
play, and display ; switches to Off
Off.
play, and display ; switches to Off
Off.
X Select ® in the main function bar with the
remote control.
A menu appears.
X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps with the
remote control.
You see the selection of Mercedes-Benz
Apps.
X Select Google Local Search with the
remote control.
Using a menu you can select a category for
the destination.
X Select At Current Position,
Position for exam-
X Select ® in the main function bar with the
remote control. ple.
Using a menu you can determine the type
A menu appears with the following options:
of search inquiry.
ROperator's Manual X Select Enter Search Term:Term:, for example.
REnter URL An input field appears.
RInternet Favorites X Enter the destination with the remote con-
RMercedes-Benz Apps trol and confirm the entry with b.
RInternet Radio You see the results list from Google.
RMercedes Mobile Website X Select the exact destination with the
RTransfer Driver's Website

remote control.
An additional menu appears.
X Select Transfer Driver's Website with
X Select Navigate to. to
the remote control.
You see the last website called up by the X A window appears on the driver's side with
driver. the message: Accept the navigation

data from Mercedes-Benz Apps?
40
41

Display settings .................................. 42
Time settings ....................................... 42
Text reader settings ............................ 44
System settings
Voice Control System settings .......... 44
Bluetooth® settings ............................ 44
Setting the system language ............. 45
Assigning a favorites button .............. 45
Importing/exporting data .................. 46
Reset function ..................................... 47
42 Time settings
Your COMAND equipment X Press W.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the
These operating instructions describe all the COMAND controller and press W to con-
standard and optional equipment for your firm.
COMAND system, as available at the time of X Select Display and press W to confirm.
System settings
X Select Day Mode,

Mode Night Mode or Auto‐
are possible. Please note that your matic by turning cVd the COMAND con-
COMAND system may not be equipped with troller and press W to confirm.
all the features described. A dot indicates the current setting.
Design Explanation
Display settings
Day Mode The display is set perma-
Setting the brightness nently to day design.
The brightness detected by the display light Night Mode The display is set perma-
sensor affects the setting options for this nently to night design.
function.
Automatic If the Automatic setting
is selected, COMAND
evaluates the readings
from the automatic vehi-
cle light sensor and auto-
matically switches
between the display
designs.
Time settings
X Press W. General information
If COMAND is equipped with a navigation sys-
tem and has GPS reception, COMAND auto-
firm.
matically sets the time and date. You can
X Select Display and press W to confirm.
change the time in minute increments. The
X Select Brightness and press W to con- date can also be changed.
firm.
X Adjust the brightness by turning cVd the
i If you adjust the time in minute incre-
ments, any time zone settings and settings
for changing between summer and stand-
firm.
ard time are lost. Switching between sum-
mer and standard time (Y page 43).
Display design
Your COMAND display features optimized
designs for operation during daytime and
night-time hours. You can customize the
design by manually selecting day or night
design, or opt for an automatic setting.
Time settings 43
i The following navigation system functions X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND
require the time, time zone and summer/ controller and press W to confirm.
standard time to be set correctly in order to X Select Time Zone and press W to confirm.
work properly: A list of countries or time zones appears.
Rroute guidance on routes with time- The # dot indicates the current setting.
System settings
dependent traffic guidance X Select the country or time zone by turning
Rcalculation of expected time of arrival cVd the COMAND controller and press W
to confirm.
i With this function, you can set the time for
A time zone list may also be displayed,
every display in the vehicle.
depending on the country selected.
X Select the time zone and press W to con-
Setting the time/date format firm.
The entry for the Automatic Time Set‐
X Press the W button. tings is accepted.
X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND Subsequent operation depends on whether
controller and press W to confirm. the automatic changeover function to sum-
X Select Format and press W to confirm. mer time is available.
The # symbols show the current settings. X To change manually: select ON or OFF and
X Set the format by turning c V d the press W to confirm.

COMAND controller and press W to con- X To change to automatic time: select
firm. Automatic and press W to confirm.
The entry for the Automatic Time Set‐
Abbreviation Meaning tings is accepted.
DD . MM . YY Day . Month . Year X To switch the automatic time setting
(date format, two digits) off/on: press the W button.
X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND
MM / DD / YYYY Month/Day/Year
date format, year (all
X Press W to confirm the Automatic Time
four digits)
Settings.
Settings
YY / MM / DD Year/Month/Day Switch the automatic time setting off ª or
date format, year (two on again O.
digits) To switch on: the menu item is switched
HH : MM Hours : Minutes on as the default setting. If the Automatic
(24 hrs) Time Settings is switched off and you
(24 hour time format) switch it on again, the last settings for the
HH : MM (AM/PM) Hours : Minutes time zone and summer time changeover
(AM/PM time format) are selected.
To switch off: the time zone is deselected
and the summer time is switched off. If
Adjusting the time zone and switching Automatic is set for the summer time
to Daylight Savings Time (Summer) changeover, a prompt will appear asking
whether this should be maintained.
X Press W. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
44 Bluetooth® settings
Setting the time manually X Press W.

X Select System by turning cVd the
firm.
X Select Voice Control and press W to
System settings
confirm.
X Select Help Window and press W to con-
firm.
You have switched the help window on O
or off ª.

Individualization
X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm. Using individualization, you can fine-tune the
X Select Set Time Manually and press W Voice Control System to your own voice and
to confirm. thus improve voice recognition. See the sep-
X Set the time by turning c V d the COMAND
arate operating instructions.
The time is accepted.
Bluetooth® settings
General information about Blue-
Text reader settings tooth®
X Press the W button. Bluetooth®-capable devices, e.g. mobile
phones, have to comply with a certain profile
X Select System by turning cVd the in order to be connected to COMAND. Every
COMAND controller and press W to con- Bluetooth® device has its own specific Blue-
firm.
tooth® name.
X Select Text Reader Speed and press W Bluetooth® technology is a standard for
to confirm. short-range wireless data transmissions up to
A list appears. The # dot indicates the cur- approximately 10 meters. Bluetooth® allows,
rent setting. for example, the exchange of vCards.
firm.
Voice Control System settings

Opening/closing the help window
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
The help window provides information in addi- tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
tion to the audible instructions during indi-
vidualization and during the subsequent voice
control.
Assigning a favorites button 45
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® Assigning a favorites button

X Press W. X To assign a favorites button: press the
The system menu appears.
W button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the X Select System by turning cVd the
System settings
firm. firm.
X Select Activate Bluetooth and press W X Select Assign as Favorite and press W
to confirm. to confirm.
This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª. The list of predefined functions appears.
The dot # indicates the currently selected
function.
Setting the system language X Select the function by turning cVd the
This function allows you to determine the lan- firm.
guage for the menu displays and the naviga- The favorites button is assigned the selec-
tion announcements. The selected language ted function.
affects the characters available for entry. X Example: to call up a favorite: press the
The navigation announcements are not avail- g favorites button.
able in all languages. If a language is not avail- This calls up the predefined function.
able, the navigation announcements will be in
You can select the following predefined func-
English.
tions in a menu:
When you set the system language, the lan-
RSplitView on/off you can switch the
on/off:
guage of the Voice Control System will
change accordingly. If the selected language screen view for the front passenger on or
is not supported by the Voice Control System, off.
English will be selected. RDisplay On/Off:
On/Off you can switch the dis-
play off or on.
RFull Screen: 'Clock':
'Clock' you can call up
X Select System by turning cVd the the full screen with the clock.
COMAND controller and press W to con- R® Menu
Menu: you can call up the online and
firm.
Internet functions.
X Select Language and press W to confirm. R360° Camera
Camera: you can call up the picture of
The list of languages appears. The # dot the 360° camera.
indicates the current setting. RFull screen: 'Map':
'Map' you can call up the
X Select the language by turning cVd the full screen with the map.
COMAND controller and press W to con- RSpoken Driving Tip: Tip you can call up the
firm. current driving recommendation.
COMAND loads the selected language and RDisplay Traffic Messages
Messages: you can call
sets it. up traffic reports.
RNavigate Home:
Home you can start route guid-
ance to your home address if you have
already entered and saved the address
(Y page 69).
46 Importing/exporting data
RDetour Menu you can call up the Detour

Menu: X Select Import/Export Data and press W
menu and then block a section of the route to confirm.
and recalculate the route (Y page 92). X Select Activate PIN Protection and
RCompass Screen
Screen: you can call up the com- press W to confirm.
pass. Activate O or deactivate ª PIN protec-
tion. When activating PIN protection, you
System settings
will be prompted to enter a PIN.

Importing/exporting data
General notes
! Never remove the stick or card when writ-
ing data to the USB stick or the memory
card. You may otherwise lose data.
Using this function, you can:
Rtransfer your personal COMAND data from
one system/vehicle to another.
Rmake a backup copy of your personal data
(export data) and load it again (import
X Enter a 4-digit PIN, select¬and press W
data).
to confirm.
Rprotect your data from unwanted export by
You will be prompted to enter the PIN
activating a pin prompt (presetting: deacti- again.
vated ª).
X Re-enter the PIN, select ¬ and press W
You can either use an SD memory card or a to confirm.
USB storage device (e.g. a USB stick) as tem- The PIN prompt now protects your personal
porary storage. data from unwanted export.
i If you deactivate your PIN protection, you
Activating/deactivating PIN protec- will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If
tion you have forgotten your PIN, a Mercedes-
Benz service station can deactivate your
PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you
can deactivate PIN protection by resetting
your personal COMAND data
(Y page 47).

firm.
Reset function 47
Importing/exporting data
System settings
If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt
appears when you select Export Data.Data
X Enter the PIN, select¬and press W to
confirm.
You can now proceed in the same way as if
PIN protection was deactivated.
X To select a preset: select Memory Card or
USB Storage and press W to confirm.
X Select All Data and press W to confirm.
This function exports all the data to the
selected disc.
or
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
X Select the data type and press W to con-
or
firm.
X Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory Depending on the previous entry, select the
stick) (Y page 197). data type for the export O or not ª.
X Press W.
The system menu appears. X Select Cont. and press W to confirm.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the i Personal music files in the MUSIC REGIS-
COMAND controller and press W to con- TER cannot be saved and imported again
firm. using this function.
X Select Import/Export Data and press W
to confirm. Reset function
X Select Import Data or Export Data and
press W to confirm. You can completely reset COMAND to the
factory settings. Amongst other things, this
will delete all personal COMAND data. This
includes the station presets, entries in the
destination memory and in the list of previous
destinations in the navigation system and
address book entries. In addition, any activa-
ted PIN protection, which you have used to
protect your data against unwanted export,
will be deactivated. Resetting is recommen-
48 Reset function
ded before selling or transferring ownership

of your vehicle, for example.
Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music
files in the MUSIC REGISTER, will be deleted.
You can also delete music files from the
MUSIC REGISTER using the "Delete all music
System settings
files" function (Y page 209).

X Press the W function button.
X Select System by turning cVd the

firm.
X Select Reset and press W to confirm.
A warning message appears asking
whether you wish to reset.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes
Yes, a prompt will appear again
asking whether you really wish to reset to
the factory settings.
If you select Yes
Yes, a message will be shown.
COMAND is reset and restarted.
If you select No
No, the process will be can-
celed.
49

Climate control status display ........... 50
Fuel consumption indicator ............... 50
ON&OFFROAD display ......................... 51
Driving conditions menu (Active
Body Control) ....................................... 51
Seat functions ..................................... 52
Vehicle functions
Rear view camera ............................... 55
Night View Assist Plus ....................... 56
360° camera ....................................... 56
50 Fuel consumption indicator
Your COMAND equipment Ã Controls the air conditioning auto-

matically
These operating instructions describe all the ñ Sets the climate control style in auto-
standard and optional equipment for your matic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE)
COMAND system, as available at the time of _ Sets the air distribution
going to print. Country-specific differences M, P or O Sets the air distribu-
are possible. Please note that your tion
¬ Turns on the defrost function
Vehicle functions

Ù Turns on maximum cooling
i The way that the climate control status
Climate control status display display is called up depends on your vehi-
cle's climate control system.
Example settings for the defrost function (top) and

for the climate mode in automatic mode
X To hide the display: turn or press the
The climate status display in the COMAND display COMAND controller.
(example) or
If you change the settings of the climate con- X Press one of the buttons on COMAND.
trol system, the climate status display
appears for three seconds at the bottom of
the screen in the COMAND display. You will Fuel consumption indicator
see the current settings of the various climate
control functions. Overview
Overview of climate control systems, see the Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
separate vehicle operating instructions. engine variant installed, fuel consumption
The climate status display appears when: can be shown in the COMAND display.
If your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle and the
X You turn the temperature control and set
installed engine variant supports it, you can
the temperature.
call up other displays (see the separate oper-
or ating instructions).
X You turn the control to set the airflow.
or
X You press one of the following buttons:
K Increases air flow
I Decreases air flow
¿ Switches climate control on/off
á Switches the ZONE function on/off
Driving conditions menu (Active Body Control) 51
Calling up/exiting the display ON&OFFROAD display

Overview
Depending on the vehicle model series, the
settings and the status of the ON&OFFROAD
functions can be shown in the COMAND dis-
play, e.g.:
Rvehicle's angle of inclination
Vehicle functions
Ruphill or downhill gradient in percentage
Rsteering angle
Further information on the ON&OFFROAD
functions can be found in the vehicle Opera-
X To call up the full screen display: press
tor's Manual.
the W button.
X In the system menu, slide ZV the
COMAND controller up until the Full Calling up displays
Screen option is selected.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
X Press W.
The system display is shown as full screen X In the system menu, slide ZV the
(without system menu). COMAND controller up until the display/
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeat-
selection window is selected.
edly until the fuel consumption indicator X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until
appears. the ON&OFFROAD display appears.

The COMAND display shows the fuel con- The COMAND display shows the settings
sumption for the last 15 minutes of the and status of the ON&OFFROAD functions.
journey.
X To exit the full-screen display: press W
the COMAND controller. Exiting the display
The system menu appears. X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until
Every bar of the graph displays the average the desired display (clock or fuel consump-
value for one minute. tion) is shown.
The fuel consumption display may differ from
the display in the FROM START trip computer
in the Trip menu; see the vehicle Operator's Driving conditions menu (Active Body
Manual. Control)
General notes
On vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC),
you can display some driving systems and
additional information in the COMAND dis-
play.
52 Seat functions
Calling up drive status regulator (ABC) The massage function cannot be started or
stopped using the memory button.
X Press W.
X In the system menu, slide ZV the
COMAND controller up until the display/ Selecting the seat
selection window is selected.
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeat-
edly until the driving conditions menu
Vehicle functions
(ABC) appears.
The corresponding displays appear in the
COMAND display.
Details on the displays:
Rfor all vehicles except AMG vehicles, see
the separate vehicle Operator's Manual
Rfor AMG vehicles, see the separate vehicle
Operator's Manual.
First select the seat which you wish to adjust.
This function is not available for all vehicles.
Exiting the display X Press the T or W button.
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until X Select Seat and press W to confirm.
the desired display (clock or fuel consump- X To switch to the lower line, for both options
tion) is shown. slide VÆ the COMAND controller.
X Select Driver's Seat or Passenger
Seat by turning cVd the COMAND con-
Seat functions troller and press W to confirm.
Overview
Using the T button next to the COMAND Adjustment functions
controller or the Seat menu item in the sys-
tem menu, you can call up different setting Adjusting the seat cushion length
functions. The following settings depend on The availability of this function depends on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series: the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
RSeat cushion length
RBackrest side bolsters
RLumbar
RBalance
RSeat cushion side bolsters
RDynamics
RMassage
i You can also store and recall the current

seat function settings using the memory
button and the corresponding memory
position switch; see the separate vehicle This function allows you to adjust the height
Operator's Manual. of the seat cushion.
Seat functions 53
X Select the seat (Y page 52). Adjusting the sides of the seat backrest
X Select Seat Surface by turning cVd the (backrest side bolsters)
COMAND Controller and press W to con- The availability of this function depends on
firm. the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
A scale appears.
X Turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND con-
troller and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the k back
Vehicle functions
button.
Adjusting the seat contour in the lum-

bar region of the seat backrest
The availability of this function depends on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
X Select the seat (Y page 52).
X Select Seatb. Sides by turning cVd the
firm.
A scale appears.
button.
i For vehicle model series with a dynamic
This function allows you to adjust the air multicontour seat: if the driving dynamics
cushions in the lumbar region of the backrest are activated and respond to a change of
(4-way lumbar support). direction (e.g. when cornering), the back-
X Select the seat (Y page 52). rest side bolsters cannot be temporarily
X Select Lumbar by turning cVd the adjusted.
firm. Adjusting the seat side bolsters
A crosshair appears. You can make two
The availability of this function depends on
settings:
the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
RVertical: to move the point of greatest
lumbar support up or down
RHorizontal: to adjust the amount of sup-
port
X Slide ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller
button.
54 Seat functions
This function allows you to adjust the air The values stand for:
cushions in the seat side bolsters. R0 - backrest and seat cushion are heated
X Select the seat (Y page 52). equally to the maximum level
X Select Seat Sides by turning cVd the R1 to 3 - the heat output to the seat cush-
COMAND controller and press W to con- ion is reduced in one-third increments
firm. R-1 to -3 - the heat output to the backrest
A scale appears. is reduced in one-third increments
Vehicle functions
X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con-

troller and press W to confirm. troller and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the k back X To exit the menu: press the k back
button. button.
Balance Massage function

The availability of this function depends on The availability of this function depends on
the vehicle model series. the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
The Balance function controls the distribution Example display (M-Class or GL-Class)
of heat on the seat backrest and cushion. X Select the seat (Y page 52).
The Balance function influences the currently X Select Massage by turning cVd the
set heating level of the seat heating; see the COMAND controller and press W to con-
separate vehicle Operator's Manual. firm.
X Select the seat (Y page 52). A list appears.
X Select Balance by turning cVd the You can select different types of massage
COMAND controller and press W to con- function:
firm. R0: Off
A scale appears and shows the current set-
R1: Slow and Gentle
ting. Positive values indicate the heat out-
put for the seat backrest, negative values R2: Slow and Vigorous
indicate the heat output for the seat cush- R3: Fast and Gentle
ion. The intensity is indicated by an orange R4: Fast and Vigorous
bar in the stylized seat above the scale.
Rear view camera 55
X Turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND con- Resetting all adjustments
The massage function runs for approx-
imately 15 to 25 minutes, depending on the
setting.
button.
Vehicle functions
Adjusting the driving dynamics
This function is available on vehicle model
series with a dynamic multicontour seat.
X Select the seat (Y page 52).
X Select Reset All by turning cVd the
firm.
A prompt appears.
If you select No
celed.
After you select Yes
Yes, all seat adjustments
are reset to the default values (factory set-
X Select the seat (Y page 52). ting).
X Select Dynamic Seat by turning cVd the
firm. Rear view camera
A scale appears.
You can select: The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your imme-
R 0:Off diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
R 1:level 1 (medium setting) ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
R2: level 2 (high setting) maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
X Turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND con- are no persons, animals or objects in the area
troller and press W to confirm. in which you are maneuvering.
X To exit the menu: press the k back The image from the rear view camera is
button. shown in the COMAND display when reverse
gear is engaged if:
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a rear view
camera
RCOMAND is switched on
Rthe Activation by R gear function is
activated.
If the function is activated, the COMAND dis-
play will automatically switch back to the pre-
56 360° camera
viously selected display as soon as you shift X To switch off the display: select Back and
out of reverse gear. press W to confirm or press the k but-
For further information on the rear view cam- ton.
era, see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
The system menu appears. 360° camera
X Select Settings by turning cVd the Important notes
Vehicle functions
COMAND controller and press W to con- The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
firm. replacement for your attention to your imme-
X Select Rear View Camera and press W to diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
confirm. ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
X Select Activation by R gear and press
are no persons, animals or objects in the area
W to confirm.
in which you are maneuvering.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Overview
Night View Assist Plus The 360° camera surveys the vehicle sur-
roundings and assists you, for example when
On vehicles with Night View Assist Plus you parking or at exits with reduced visibility.
can have the image from Night View Assist The 360° camera images can be shown in full
Plus shown on the COMAND display. screen mode or in seven different split-screen
X Switch on COMAND (Y page 29). views on the COMAND display. A split-screen
view also includes a top view of the vehicle.
X Activate Night View Assist Plus, see the
This view is calculated from the data supplied
separate operating instructions.
by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The image from Night View Assist Plus
appears in the COMAND display.
X To adjust the brightness: select Bright‐ Displaying the 360° camera image
ness by turning cVd the COMAND con- The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cam-
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm. era
RCOMAND is switched on (Y page 29)
X Switching automatic activation on/off:
Rthe 360° Camera function is activated
select Night View Assist Auto. Acti‐
vation and press W to confirm. You can activate the 360° display by:
Switch the option on O or off ª. Rengaging reverse gear (only possible if the
Option switched on: while using other func- Activation by R gear option is activa-
tions e.g. the navigation system, Night View ted)
Assist Plus is active in the background. In Rselecting the 360° Camera menu item in
the dark, in unlit surroundings and at the System menu
speeds in excess of 37 mph (60 km/h), the Rpressing and holding the W function
Night View image is automatically dis- button
played as soon as pedestrians or animals
are detected.
360° camera 57
As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of For a detailed description of the 360° cam-
19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activa- era, see the separate vehicle Operator's Man-
ted, the function switches off. The COMAND ual.
display switches back to the previously selec-
ted view.
You can also switch the display by selecting
the & symbol in the display and pressing W
the COMAND controller.
Vehicle functions
X To switch reverse gear activation on/
off: press the W function button.
firm.
X Select 360° Camera and press W to con-
firm.
X Select Activation by R gear and press
W to confirm.
i You need only switch this function on if
you want the 360° camera image to be dis-
played when you engage reverse gear. The
other activation options are always availa-
ble as well.
X To display the 360° camera image:
press the W function button for at least
2 seconds.
The full-screen display appears.
or
firm.
X Select 360° Camera and press W to con-
firm.
The 360° camera image appears in split-
screen mode.
or
X Engage reverse gear (only possible if the
Activation by R gear option is activa-
ted)
The 360° camera split-screen image with
backing up image appears.
58
59

Introduction ......................................... 60
Basic settings ...................................... 62
Destination entry ................................ 63
Entering a POI ...................................... 76
Personal POIs ...................................... 82
Search & Send ..................................... 86
Route guidance ................................... 87
Navigation
Traffic reports ..................................... 99
Destination memory ......................... 103
Previous destinations ....................... 107
Map operation and map settings .... 108
Additional settings ........................... 114
Problems with the navigation sys-
tem ..................................................... 120
60 Introduction
Your COMAND equipment have been diverted or the direction of a one-

way street may have changed.
These operating instructions describe all the For this reason, you must always observe
standard and optional equipment for your road and traffic rules and regulations during
COMAND system, as available at the time of your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
going to print. Country-specific differences ulations always have priority over the sys-
are possible. Please note that your tem's driving recommendations.
COMAND system may not be equipped with Navigation announcements are intended to
all the features described. direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Navigation
Please always use this feature instead of con-

Introduction sulting the map display for directions. Look-
Important safety notes ing at the icons or map display can distract
you from traffic conditions and driving, and
G WARNING increase the risk of an accident.
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from General notes
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
Operational readiness of the navigation
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
system
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this The navigation system must determine the
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention position of the vehicle before first use or
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- whenever operational status is restored.
ment when the vehicle is stationary. Therefore, you may have to drive for a while
before precise route guidance is possible.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving GPS reception
when operating COMAND.
Among other things, correct functioning of
COMAND calculates the route to the destina-
the navigation system depends on GPS recep-
tion without taking account of the following,
tion. In certain situations, GPS reception may
for example:
be impaired, there may be interference or
Rtraffic lights there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tun-
Rstop and yield signs nels or parking garages.
Rmerging lanes
i Using roof carriers may impair the correct
Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no functioning of a roof antenna (phone, sat-
stopping zone ellite radio, GPS).
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
Rnarrow bridges Entry restriction
COMAND can give incorrect navigation com- On vehicles for certain countries, there is a
mands if the actual street/traffic situation restriction on entering data.
does not correspond with the digital map's The restriction is active from a vehicle speed
data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor of above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). As
all routes in an area. For example, a route may soon as the speed falls below approximately
Introduction 61
2 mph (3 km/h), the restriction becomes

inactive.
When the restriction is active, certain entries
cannot be made. This will be indicated by the
fact that certain menu items are grayed out
and cannot be selected.
The following entries are not possible, for
example:
Rentering the destination city and street
Rentering a destination via the map
Navigation
Rentering POIs in the vicinity of a city or via a Map without the menu (route guidance inactive)
name search : Current vehicle position
Rediting entries ; Map orientation selected
Rusing the number keypad for direct entry = Map scale selected
Other entries are possible, such as entering i Route guidance active means that you
points of interest in the vicinity of the desti- have entered a destination and that
nation or current position. COMAND has calculated the route. The dis-
play shows the route, changes of direction
and lane recommendations. Navigation
Switching to navigation mode announcements guide you to your destina-
tion.
Route guidance inactive means that no
destination has been entered yet and no
route has been calculated yet.
Showing/hiding the menu

You can show or hide the menu on the map.
X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full Screen
Map showing the menu; route guidance inactive menu item is shown, press W to confirm.
: Status bar or
; Main function bar X Press the k back button.
= Current vehicle position The map can be seen in the full-screen dis-
? Navigation menu bar play.
X Press the Ø function button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
The map is displayed with the menu either controller when the map is shown in full-
shown or hidden. screen display.
or
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
The map is displayed with the menu shown.
Z
62 Basic settings
Basic settings You can select the following route types:

RFast Route COMAND calculates a route
Route:
Setting route type and route options
with the shortest (minimized) journey time.
RDynamic Traffic Route:Route is the same
route type as Fast Route.
Route In addition,
COMAND takes into account any relevant
traffic reports received during route guid-
ance. The navigation system can help you
avoid a traffic jam, for example, by recal-
culating the route.
Navigation
RDynamic TRF. Route Only After

Request: is the same route type as
Request
Dynamic Traffic Route.Route After recalcu-
Route settings menu (start of menu) lating the route, COMAND asks you
: To select the route type whether you want to adopt the new route or
whether you want to continue along the
; To set the number of persons in the vehi-
original route.
cle for the use of carpool lanes
REco Route:
Route the Eco Route (economical
= To set route options
route) is a variant of the Fast Route type.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by COMAND will attempt to minimize the jour-
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND ney distance at the expense of a slightly
controller and press W to confirm. increased journey time.
X Select Route Settings and press W to RShort Route
Route: COMAND calculates a route
confirm. with the shortest possible (minimized)
The route settings menu appears. route distance.
X Select a route type and press W to confirm.
i The route calculated may, for example,
A filled circle indicates the current setting.
include ferry connections, even if the
X Select the route option(s) and press W to Avoid Ferries route option is switched
confirm. on.
The route options are switched on O or off In some cases, COMAND may not be able
ª, depending on the previous status. to take all the selected route options into
account, e.g. when calculating particularly
i If you change the route type and/or the
long routes.
route options while route guidance is
active, COMAND will calculate a new route. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
If you change the route type and/or the controller.
route options while route guidance is inac-
tive, COMAND uses the new setting for the
next route guidance. Setting the number of persons in the
Route guidance active: a destination has vehicle for the use of carpool lanes
been entered and the route has been cal- For route calculation, you can take HOV or
culated. carpool lanes into account.
Route guidance inactive: no destination If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please
has been entered yet and no route has been observe the applicable laws as well as the
calculated yet. local and time limitation conditions.
Destination entry 63
Carpool lanes may only be used under certain

conditions. They can normally be used when
there are two people in the vehicle. However,
there are also carpool lanes which can only be
used when there are three or more people in
the vehicle. In California, lone drivers can use
a carpool lane if their vehicle's emission level
or fuel consumption is below a fixed thresh-
old.
Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific
times (e.g. during the peak period).
Navigation
Carpool lanes are identified by HOV symbols X Select 1, 2 or More than 2 by turning cVd
on special road signs and by markings on the and press W to confirm.
road. The road signs may also include the A # dot indicates the current setting.
designation CARPOOL
CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged
as a separate lane next to the others or are
built as a physically separate lane. Destination entry
Depending on the setting under Number of Important safety notes
Occupants in Vehicle
Vehicle, COMAND uses car-
pool lanes when calculating the route. G WARNING
COMAND then guides you in and out of car- If you operate information systems and com-
pool lanes using visual and acoustic driving munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
directions. cle while driving, you will be distracted from
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driving
when operating COMAND.
X In the route settings menu, select Number
of Occupants in Vehicle by turning
cVd the COMAND controller. Entering a destination by address
Introduction
When entering an address as the destination,
you have the following options:
Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code
and street
Rentering the state/province, city and cen-
ter
Z
64 Destination entry
Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code,

street and house number
Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code,
street and intersection
Rentering the state/province, street, city
and house number
Rentering the state/province, street and
house number
Rentering the state/province, street and
intersection
Navigation
Address entry menu

i You can only enter those cities, streets,
ZIP codes etc. that are stored on the digital X Select Address Entry and press W to
map. This means that for some countries, confirm.
you cannot enter ZIP codes, for example. The address entry menu appears. If you
have previously entered a destination, this
The step-by-step instructions for entering an
will be shown in the display.
address use the following example data:
New York (state) Depending on the amount of the address
entered and the data in the digital map, some
New York (city)
menu items may not be available at all or may
40 Broadway not yet be available.
Of course, you can freely enter information Example: after entering the state/province,
such as state/province, city, street and the menu items Map
Map, No.
No., Center
Center, Inter‐
house number, for example to enter your section, Save and Start are not available.
section
home address. The ZIP menu item will not be available
unless the digital map contains zip codes.
Address entry menu
Calling up the address entry menu Entering the state/province, city, street
and number
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button. Selecting a state/province
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND X Call up the address entry menu
controller. (Y page 64).
X Select State/Prov in the address entry
X Select Destination by turning cVd the
menu by turning cVd the COMAND con-
firm.
A menu with the available lists appears:
RLast States/Provinces
RStates (U.S.A.)
RProvinces (Canada)
X To select a list: turn cVd the COMAND

The list of selected states/provinces
appears.
X To select a state/province: turn cVd the
firm.
The address entry menu appears again. The
state/province selected has now been
entered.
Navigation
Entering the city List of cities as selection list
X Call up the address entry menu Option 2: city list as selection list
(Y page 64). X Select an entry by turning cVd the
X Select City in the address entry menu by COMAND controller.
turning cVd the COMAND controller and X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
press W to confirm. firm your selection.
You will see the city list either with the The address entry menu appears again. The
character bar (option 1) or as a selection city has now been entered.
list (option 2).
Entering the street name
X Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 64).
X Select Street in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
firm.
You will see the street list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
City list with character bar

Option 1: city list with the character bar
X Enter NEW YORK
YORK. Character entry, using city
input as an example (Y page 35).
Street list with character bar

Option 1: street list with character bar
X Enter BROADWAY
BROADWAY. Character entry, using city
Z

firm.
You will see the house number list either
with the character bar (option 1) or as a
selection list (option 2).
Navigation
Street list as selection list

Option 2: street list as selection list
X Select a street by turning cVd the
firm.
If an entry has the G symbol, it is ambig- House number list with character bar
uous. You can select the entry you want Option 1: house number list with character
from an additional selection list. bar
X Enter 4 and 0. Character entry, using city
X Select an entry by turning cVd the

COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, press W to con- House number list as selection list
firm your selection. Option 2: house number list as selection list
street has now been entered.
COMAND controller.
Entering the house number
X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
Entering a house number will delete a previ-
firm your selection.
ously entered intersection.
X Call up the address entry menu house number has now been entered.
(Y page 64).
X Select No. in the address entry menu by
turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
Entering the ZIP code, center and inter- X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
section firm your selection.
If COMAND is able to assign the ZIP code
Entering the ZIP code
unambiguously to a specific address, the
X Call up the address entry menu address entry menu appears again. The ZIP
(Y page 64). code appears in place of the city's name.
X Select ZIP in the address entry menu by If COMAND cannot assign the ZIP code
turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the unambiguously to a specific address, the
COMAND controller and press W to con- address entry menu also appears again.
firm. The ZIP code is automatically entered. You
You will see the ZIP code list either with the can now enter the street for a more precise
Navigation
character bar (option 1) or as a selection location. Only streets in the area covered
list (option 2). by the entered ZIP code are available.
X Start route calculation (Y page 69).
Entering the center

Entering a center will, for example, delete a
previously entered street.
(Y page 64).
X Select Center in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
List of ZIP codes with character bar You will see the center list either with the
Option 1: ZIP code list with character bar character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
X Enter a ZIP code. Character entry, using city
City center list with character bar
ZIP code list as selection list

Option 1: center list with character bar
Option 2: ZIP code list as selection list X Enter a center. Character entry, using city
X Select the desired ZIP code by turning cVd
Z
68
Navigation Destination entry
Center list as selection list Intersection list with character bar

Option 2: center list as selection list : List entry most closely resembling the
characters entered so far
X Select a center by turning cVd the
; List
COMAND controller.
= Character bar
firm your selection. Option 1: intersection list with character bar
The address entry menu appears again. The X Enter an intersection. Character entry,
center selected has been entered. using city input as an example (Y page 35).
Entering the intersection

(Y page 64).
X Select Intersection in the address entry
menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
firm.
You will see the intersection list either with
the character bar (option 1) or as a selec-
tion list (option 2). Intersection list as selection list
Option 2: intersection list as selection list
X Select an intersection by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
intersection selected has been entered.
Starting route calculation Option 2 – route guidance is already

active: if route guidance is already active, a
prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to terminate the currently active route guid-
ance.
If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND will stop route
guidance and start route calculation for the
new destination.
If you select No
No, COMAND will continue
Navigation
with the active route guidance.
i Route calculation takes a certain amount
Address entry menu with destination address
of time. The time depends on the distance
: Destination address
from the destination, for example.
; Starts route calculation COMAND calculates the route using the
You can have COMAND calculate a route to digital map data.
the destination address, or you can save the The calculated route can differ from the
destination address (for example, as your ideal route, for example because of incom-
home address (My address)) (Y page 69). plete map data. Please also refer to the
X Call up the address entry menu notes about the digital map (Y page 118).
(Y page 64).
X In the address entry menu, confirm Start Entering and saving your home address
by pressing W. You can either enter your home address for
If no other route has been calculated, route the first time (option 1) or edit a previously
calculation starts immediately (option 1). If stored home address (option 2).
another route has already been calculated X Option 1: enter the address, e.g. a city,
(route guidance is active), a prompt
street and house number (Y page 64).
appears (option 2).
i The Continue menu item is displayed X After entering the address in the address
instead of Start if Calculate Alterna‐ entry menu, select Save by turning c V d
tive Routes is activated in the navigation and Z V Æ sliding the COMAND controller
menu (option 2) (Y page 93). and press W to confirm.
Option 1 – no route guidance active: route X Select Save as "My Address" and press
calculation starts. While route calculation is in W to confirm.
progress, an arrow will indicate the direction COMAND stores your home address as My
to your destination. Below this, you will see a Address in the destination memory.
message, e.g. Calculating Fast X Option 2: proceed as described under
Route....
Route...
"Option 1".
Once the route has been calculated, route A prompt appears asking whether the cur-
guidance begins. rent home address should be overwritten.
If the vehicle is not on a digitized road, the
following is displayed:
X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
After selecting Yes
Yes, the Data saved. mes-
Rthe linear distance to the destination sage appears.
Rthe direction to the destination
Rthe Off Mapped Road message
Z
Selecting a destination from the des- B Characters not currently available

tination memory (e.g. My Address) C Character bar
Introduction D Currently selected character
E Cancels an entry
The destination memory always contains an F Characters currently available
entry named "My Address". You may wish to
assign your home address to this entry, for X Enter a destination, e.g. "My Address".
example (Y page 69), and select it for route Character entry, using city input as an
guidance. This entry is always located at the example (Y page 35).
top of the list in the destination memory.
Option 2: destination memory list as
Navigation

Ø button. selection list
controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
tem menu bar by turning cVd the
firm.
X Select From Memory and press W to con-
firm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
Destination memory list
as a selection list (option 2).
X Select My Address by turning cVd the
Option 1: destination memory list with COMAND controller.
character bar X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
The address entry menu appears again.
"My Address" has been entered.
X To start route calculation: select Start
Entering a destination from the list of

last destinations
: Character entered by the user Ø button.
; Characters automatically added by the X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
system controller.
= List entry most closely resembling the
characters entered so far X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
? Switches to the selection list
A Deletes an entry firm.
Navigation
X Select From Last Destinations and : Current vehicle position
press W to confirm. ; Crosshair
X Select the desired destination by turning
= Details of the crosshair position
cVd the COMAND controller and press W ? Map scale selected
to confirm. X Select Using Map and press W to confirm.
The address entry menu appears again. The You will see the map with a crosshair.
destination address selected has been
Display = depends on the settings selected
entered.
in "Map information in the display"
X To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 111). You can see the current street
and press W to confirm. name if the digital map contains the neces-
Once the route has been calculated, route sary data, You can see the coordinates of the
guidance begins (Y page 69). crosshair if the geo-coordinate display is
switched on and the GPS signal is strong
i “Last destinations” memory enough.
(Y page 107).
Moving the map and selecting the des-
tination
Entering a destination using the map
X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or
Calling up the map aVb the COMAND controller.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
Ø button. cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
controller.
Turning clockwise zooms out from the map;
X Select Destination in the navigation sys- turning counter-clockwise zooms in.
firm.
Z
72
Navigation Destination entry
X To select a destination: press W the X Select Using Geo-Coordinates and

COMAND controller once or several times. press W to confirm.
If COMAND is unable to assign a unique An entry menu appears.
address, you will see either the address You can now enter the latitude and longitude
entry menu with the destination address or coordinates with the COMAND controller or
a selection list. the number keypad (Y page 35).
X Select a destination by turning cVd the X To change a value: turn cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con- COMAND controller.
firm. X To move the mark within the line: slide
If the destination is within the limits of the XVY the COMAND controller.
digital map, COMAND attempts to assign
X To move the mark between the lines:
the destination to the map.
slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
If the destination can be assigned, you will
X To confirm the value: press W the
see the address entry menu with the
address of the destination. If not, you will COMAND controller.
see the Destination From Map entry. i If the selected position is outside the dig-
X To start route calculation: select Start ital map, COMAND uses the nearest digi-
and press W to confirm. tized road for route calculation. You will see
the The co-ordinates are outside
the map area message. If the selected
Entering a destination using geo-coor- position is located over a body of water, you
dinates will see the The destination is in a
body of water. Please select
X To switch to navigation mode: press the another destination. message.
Ø button.
controller. Entering a destination using
Mercedes-Benz Apps
tem menu bar by turning cVd the X To switch to navigation mode: press the
COMAND controller and press W to con- Ø button.
firm. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
COMAND controller and press W to con- Entering way points

firm.
Introduction
X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps and press W
to confirm. You can map the route yourself by entering up
If an Internet connection is established, you to four way points. The sequence of the way
will see the message: Do you want to points can be changed at any time.
accept the navigation data sent COMAND provides a selection of predefined
via Mercedes-Benz Apps? destinations in eight categories for this pur-
pose, e.g. GAS STATION or COFFEE SHOP
SHOP. You
can also use the destination entry options to
Navigation
Street View enter way points.
Creating way points

Ø button.
Way point menu (with destination, without way
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND point)
controller. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
X Select Destination in the lower menu bar Ø button.
by turning cVd the COMAND controller X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Address Entry and press W to
confirm. X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
X Select icon : in the address entry menu
firm.
If an Internet connection is established, you
will see the Street View basic display. X Select Intermediate Destinations and
X To explore the view of the street: turn

press W to confirm.
The destination is entered into the way
cVd or slide XVY,
points menu. The way points are not yet
ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
entered.
X To return to navigation: press the k
X Confirm Add: by pressing W the COMAND
button.
controller.
Z
Selection Step
Using the Map X Enter a destina-
tion using the map
(Y page 71).
Using Geo-Coor‐ X Enter a destina-

dinates tion using the geo-
coordinates
(Y page 72).
Navigation
X Select the category or Other by turning

to confirm.
After selecting a category, the POIs which
are available along the route and in the
vicinity are displayed.
COMAND first searches for destinations
along the route. Searching for destinations
then continues within a radius of approx-
imately 60 miles (100 km) of the vehicle
position.
X After selecting Other
Other, select one of the X Select POI and press W to confirm.
destination entry options from the list. After selecting a POI or entering a destina-
tion, the address of the way point is dis-
Selection Step played.
Address Entry X Enter a destina- After entering a destination using the map,
tion by address the address entry menu is displayed. OK is
(Y page 63). highlighted.
From Memory X Select a destina-

tion from the des-
tination memory
(Y page 70).
From Last Desti‐ X Select a destina-

nations tion from the list
of last destina-
tions (Y page 70).
From POIs X Select a point of

interest X To accept the way point: confirm OK by
(Y page 76). pressing W.
Once you have accepted the way point, it is
From Personal X Enter a destina- entered in the way point menu.
POIs tion from the per-
sonal POIs
(Y page 85).
X To display the details: select Details by

press W to confirm.
X To make a call: select Call with the
firm. COMAND switches to telephone
mode (Y page 132).
i This menu item is available if the way
point has a telephone number and if a
mobile phone is connected to COMAND
Navigation
(Y page 126). X Select a way point in the way point menu by
X To call up the map: select Map with the turning cVd the COMAND controller and
COMAND controller and press W to con- press W to confirm.
firm. A menu appears.
X You can move the map and select the des-
tination.
X To store the way point in the destina-
tion memory: select Presets with the
firm (Y page 105).
X To change a way point: select Edit from

the menu and press W to confirm.
X Change the address, e.g. the city and
street, and confirm with OK
OK.
The way point menu appears and displays
the modified way point.
Way point menu with two way point entries
Editing way points

Way points can be:
Rchanged
Rchanged in sequence in the way point menu
Rdeleted
To change the sequence, at least one way
point and the destination must be entered.
You can change the sequence of the way
points and the destination.
Z
76 Entering a POI
X To change the sequence: from the menu, If you select No

No, the search is canceled.
select Move by turning cVd the COMAND X Select a gas station and press W to con-
controller and press W to confirm. firm.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and The address of the gas station is displayed.
move the way point or destination to the X Confirm Start by pressing W.
desired position, then press W to confirm. The selected gas station is entered into
X To delete way points: from the menu, position 1 of the way points menu. Route
select Delete and press W to confirm. guidance begins.
If the way points menu already contains
Accepting way points for the route four way points, a prompt will be displayed,
Navigation
asking you whether you wish to enter the

XSelect Start in the way point menu by gas station into position 1. If you select
turning cVd the COMAND controller and Yes, the gas station is transferred into the
Yes
press W to confirm. list and way point 4 is deleted.
The route is calculated with the entered
way points.
i Continue is displayed instead of Start Entering a POI
when Calculate Alternative Routes
Calling up the POI menu
is activated in the navigation menu
(Y page 93).
i If a way point has been passed during
route guidance, the way point will be dis-
played in the way point menu with a green
arrow. Once the route has been recalcula-
ted, the way point is deleted from the way
point menu.
Searching for a gas station when the

fuel level is low
If the reserve fuel warning is displayed, you Example: POI menu
will see the message: Fuel tank reserve POIs are predefined destinations within cat-
level. Do you want to start the egories, e.g. a gas station in the AUTOMOTIVE
search for gas stations?.
stations? category.
X Select Yes or No No. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
If you select Yes
Yes, the gas station search Ø button.
starts. When the search is complete, a list
of the gas stations available along the route
controller.
or in the vicinity is displayed.
firm.
X Select From POIs and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Entering a POI 77
X Choose one of the options and press W to

confirm.
Further steps are arranged in a table
according to the option selected
(Y page 78).
Navigation
Z
78 Entering a POI
Defining the position for the POI search
Selection Characteristic Instructions

Near Destina‐ Entry is only possible X Select Near Destination from the POI
tion when route guidance is menu and press W to confirm.
active. X Select a POI category (Y page 79).
Current Posi‐ The system looks for a X Select Current Position in the POI
tion point of interest in the menu and press W to confirm.
vicinity of the current X Select a POI category (Y page 79).
Navigation
vehicle position.
Other City After entering a city, the Option 1
system looks for the POI X Select Other City in the POI menu and
within the city. press W to confirm.
X If desired, select the state/province
(Y page 64).
X Enter the city. Proceed as described in
the "Entering a city" section (Y page 64).
X Select a POI category (Y page 79).
Option 2
X Enter a city in the address entry menu
(Y page 64).
X Select POI and press W to confirm.
X Select a point of interest category.
Search By Name You can call up all the X Select Search By Name in the POI menu
points of interest in the and press W to confirm.
digital map or focus your X Select All POIs or one of the three pre-
search on the three previously selected positions.
viously selected posi- The POI list with character bar appears.
tions. X Proceed as described in the "POI list with
character bar" section (Y page 80).
Search By Phone This function gives you X Select Search By Phone Number and
Number access to all POIs that press W to confirm.
have a phone number. You will see a list of phone numbers.
X Proceed as described in the "POI list with
character bar" section (Y page 80).
Entering a POI 79
Searching by point of interest cate-

gory
Navigation
Point of interest search near the current position
(example)
The POI search is canceled when 50 POIs
POI category list
have been found.
X Call up the POI menu (Y page 76). COMAND searches within a radius of approx-
After entering a city, the POI category list imately 60 miles (100 km).
appears after choosing the menu item
Once the search is completed, the POI list is
Near Destination,
Destination Current Position
displayed.
or Other City.
City
X Select a POI category by turning cVd the
If COMAND does not find any POIs within this
radius, it extends its search range to approx-
imately 125 miles (200 km).
firm. The G arrow behind an entry shows
that other categories are available. If COMAND finds one POI within this radius, it
finishes the search.
POI list
Introduction
GAS STATION category selected

X Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The search for points of interest begins in
the vicinity of the selected position.
POI list (example)

The POI list displays the search results for the
category in the vicinity of the selected posi-
tion.
Z
80 Entering a POI
The search results display the following infor- Further information on searching via POI cat-
mation: egories (Y page 79).
Ran arrow that shows the linear direction to X Select the POI in the POI list by turning
the point of interest cVd the COMAND controller and press W
Rthe linear distance to the POI to confirm.
Rthe name of the POI
The complete address of the point of inter-
est selected is shown.
i The arrow and linear distance to the des- X To start route calculation: select
tination are not visible if you have entered a
Start ; and press W to confirm.
POI after entering another city.
X To store an address in the destination
Navigation
The arrow is also not shown when search-

memory: select Save = and press W to
ing for a POI in the vicinity of the destina-
tion. confirm. You can now select storing
options (Y page 105).
Depending on the POI selected, COMAND
X To show the detailed view: select
uses different reference points in deter-
mining the linear distance to the destina- Details ? and press W to confirm.
tion: X To make a call: select Call
CallA and press
Rvicinity of current position: the linear dis-
W to confirm. COMAND switches to tele-
phone mode (Y page 132).
tance is the distance of the point of inter-
est from the current vehicle position. i This menu item is available if the POI has
Rvicinity of destination: the linear distance
a telephone number and a mobile phone is
is the distance from the destination connected to COMAND (Y page 126).
entered to the point of interest. X To call up the map: select Map
MapC and
press W to confirm.
Selecting a POI X You can move the map and select the des-
tination (Y page 71).
POI list with character bar
: Point of interest with address

; To start route calculation
= To store an address in the destination
memory Search by name in the vicinity of the destination
? To display details (example)
A To make a call (when available) If you have selected Search By Name in the
B To cancel selection POI menu and then defined the position for
C To display a point of interest's position on the search (Y page 78), the POI list with char-
the map acter bar appears.
Entering a POI 81
Depending on your selection, you can select

all available points of interest on the digital
map or the points of interest in the vicinity of
the selected position.
X Proceed as described in "Searching for a
phone book entry" (Y page 137).
If COMAND can assign the characters
entered to one entry unambiguously, the
address entry appears automatically.
Navigation
and press W to confirm. ZAGAT example description
X To show the information: select Details
ZAGAT® survey service
Selecting a POI using the map
The Z icon before a search result shows that a

ZAGAT® rating is available for this entry.
Point of interest on the map
You can select points of interest that are
available in the selected (visible) section of
the map. The POI is highlighted on the map,
you will see further information on the upper
edge of the display.
Ø button.
controller.
: ZAGAT ratings X Select Guide in the navigation system
; To display details menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
X Select an entry with the "Z" icon by turning controller and press W to confirm.
cVd the COMAND controller and press W If points of interest are available:
to confirm. Depending on the map scale selected,
The ZAGAT evaluations appear. point of interest icons appear on the map.
The scale at which the icons are displayed
Z
82 Personal POIs
on the map varies according to the icon. Settings

You can select the icons that you want
COMAND to display. Calling up the "Personal POIs" menu
If no points of interest are available, you will
see a message to this effect.
i You also see this message if you have
selected the No Symbols menu item under
"Map display" (Y page 110).
X To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
Navigation
X To select a POI: select Next or Previous

X To show details for the selection: select
Details and press W to confirm.
Ø button.
X To change to the map: slide ZV the X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
COMAND controller. controller.
You can move the map and select the map
section. X Select Navi in the main function bar by
X To start route calculation: select Start controller and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the point X Select Personal POIs and press W to
of interest should be used as the destina- confirm.
tion.
Displaying personal POIs on the map
XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.
i Cont. is displayed instead of Start when
Calculate Alternative Routes is acti-
vated in the navigation menu (Y page 93).
Personal POIs
General notes
i The use of personal POIs for displaying
traffic surveillance equipment is not per-
mitted in every country. Please observe the
country-specific regulations and adapt The personal POIs are shown on the map with
your speed accordingly when driving. an icon according to their category.
X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 82).
X Select Display Personal POIs On Map
in the menu and press W to confirm.
You can select different categories.
Personal POIs 83
Selection Explanation X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu

(Y page 82).
ª Not Clas‐ Standard entry for per- X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Vis‐
sified sonal POIs ual Warning For Personal POIs and
ª COMAND Personal POIs (destina- press W to confirm.
tions, routes) that you The menu displays the available categories.
have imported via the X Select a category and press W to confirm.
online function This will switch the visual warning for all
(Y page 171). personal POIs of this category on O or off
ª, depending on the previous setting.
Navigation
If you have created your own categories (e.g.
"Fishing", "Hotels"), they are also displayed Acoustic notification for personal POIs
(Y page 83).
A gong sounds when the vehicle is approach-
X Select a category and press W to confirm.
ing a personal POI. The function for the cor-
The icon display is switched on O or off ª, responding category must be activated for
depending on the previous status. this.
i The icons will be displayed in the following X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
map scales: (Y page 82).
R1/16 mile (50 m) X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Acous‐
R1/8 mile (100 m) tic Notification for Personal POIs
R1/4 mile (200 m) and press W to confirm.
R1/2 mile (500 m) The menu displays the available categories.
X Select a category and press W to confirm.
Visual warning for personal POIs This will switch the acoustic notification for
all personal POIs of this category on O or
off ª, depending on the previous setting.
Managing categories for personal

points of interest
If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI,

this is highlighted on the map. The display for
the corresponding category must be activa-
ted for this.
Z
84 Personal POIs
X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
(Y page 82). If you select Yes
Yes, the category will be
X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Man‐ deleted.
age Categories For Personal POIs If you select No
and press W to confirm. celed.
Managing personal POIs

X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 82).
X Select Manage Categories for Per‐
Navigation
sonal POIs in the menu and press W to

confirm.
X Select Not Classified,
Classified COMAND or your
own category and press W to confirm.
X Select a personal POI and press W to con-
X To create a new category: select New and firm.
press W to confirm. The personal point of interest is displayed.
X Enter the name of the category. Character For further information on managing personal
entry (Y page 33). POI categories (Y page 85):
X Select the ¬ icon and press W to con- RRenaming
firm. RChanging the category
A list with icons appears. You can assign an RDeleting
icon to the category.
X Select a symbol by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con- Saving personal POIs
firm. There are three ways to save personal points
You have created a new category with a of interest. You must insert an SD memory
name and icon. This category appears card to do so. The No Memory Card message
when selecting the display on the map or otherwise appears.
when selecting the destination.
Personal POIs and routes are saved on the
X To rename a category, to change an memory card in the same data format in
icon: select Rename or Change Icon and which the geographical data is stored. This
press W to confirm. format is based on the open GPX (GPS
X Proceed as described under "To create a Exchange) format.
new category". Option 1
XTo delete a category: select Delete and X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
press W to confirm. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
A prompt appears asking whether the cat- Ø button.
egory should be deleted.
i If you delete a category, all points of inter-
est of this category are also deleted.
Personal POIs 85
X Hide the menu to show the map in full Importing personal POIs via the online
screen mode (Y page 61). function
X Press W the COMAND controller for longer
You can import personal POIs (destinations,
than two seconds.
routes) via the online function (Y page 171).
The current position of the vehicle is saved
When importing, you can choose whether to
as a personal POI on the SD memory card in
write files to the SD memory card or to file
the Not Classified category.
them in the address book. The imported per-
i The crosshair position is saved in the sonal POIs have their own icon and are filed in
scrolling map function (Y page 108). the COMAND category.
Option 2
Navigation
Selecting as the destination
Ø button.
controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
X Select Save Position As Personal POI
or Save Crosshair Pos. as Personal
POI ("Move map" function active) and press
W to confirm.
The list of personal categories appears. X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
X Select a category and press W to confirm. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
X Name for the personal point of interest. Ø button.
Character entry (Y page 33). X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
Option 3 controller.
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
X To switch to navigation mode: press the tem menu bar by turning cVd the
Ø button. COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
(Y page 64). X Select From Personal POIs and press W
X Select Save from the address entry menu to confirm.
and press W to confirm. The categories of personal POIs appear.
X Select Save As Personal POI and press
W to confirm.
X Select a category.
X Enter the name.
The current address is saved as a personal
point of interest on the SD memory card.
Z
86 Search & Send
Selection Explanation X To change to the map: select Map and

press W to confirm.
Not Classi‐ Standard entry for per- The position of the personal point of inter-
fied sonal points of interest. est is shown in the map.
COMAND Personal POIs which you i A symbol is displayed according to the
have imported via the "Displaying personal POIs on the map" set-
online function ting (Y page 82).
(Y page 171). X To start route calculation: select Start
Coffee Shops Symbol and category that
If route guidance has been activated, a
you have created yourself
Navigation
prompt will appear asking whether you

(Y page 83).
wish to accept the personal point of inter-
est as the destination.
If route guidance has not been activated,
route calculation for the personal point of
interest will start immediately.
If you select Yes
Yes, the personal POI is accep-
ted as the destination.
If you select No
celed.
X To make a call: select Call and press W to
confirm. COMAND switches to telephone
In the example, the Coffee Shops category mode (Y page 133).
is selected.
i Call is available if the personal POI has a
The personal points of interest for this cate- telephone number and a mobile phone is
gory are shown. connected to COMAND (Y page 126).
X To delete a personal POI: select Delete
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the point of interest.
If you select Yes
Yes, the personal POI is
deleted.
If you select No
celed.
X Select a personal POI and press W to con-

firm. Search & Send
X To rename a personal POI: select Rename Notes
i To use Search & Send, your vehicle needs
X To change the category: select Change to be equipped with mbrace, a navigation
Category and press W to confirm. system and a valid mbrace subscription.
Route guidance 87
Search & Send is a service assisting you in mation individually for every address to be
entering destinations for the navigation sys- downloaded.
tem. This mbrace service can send a destina-
tion address directly from the Google Maps®
website to the navigation system of your vehi-
cle.
Selecting and sending a destination

address
Navigation
Please also refer to the notes about address
entry online: maps.google.com.
X Call up the maps.google.com website and
X Select Yes when the prompt for starting the
enter the destination address in the
navigation system is shown. The window
address entry field.
for starting the navigation system appears
X Click the corresponding button to send the (Y page 69).
destination address to the e-mail address X Select Start
Start.
registered with mbrace.
or
X Enter the e-mail address you specified
X Select No to store the downloaded desti-
when setting up your mbrace account into
the corresponding field in the "Send" dialog nation in the destination memory for later
window. use.
X Click "Send". i The destination addresses are downloa-
ded in the same order as they are sent.
If you own several Mercedes-Benz vehicles
Calling up destination addresses equipped with mbrace and a valid sub-
scriber account: each destination address
can be downloaded by each vehicle. This
requires each vehicle to be registered with
an e-mail address in your mbrace account.
Route guidance
Important notes
COMAND calculates the route to the destina-
tion without taking account of the following,
for example:
XPress the ï mbrace information button.
Rtrafficlights
Downloading of the destination address to
the navigation system of your vehicle Rstop and yield signs
begins. Rmerging lanes
i If you have sent more than one destina- Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no
tion address to your vehicle's navigation stopping zone
system, you will need to call up the infor- Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
Rnarrow bridges
Z
88 Route guidance
COMAND may give differing navigation com-

mands if the actual street/traffic situation
does not correspond with the digital map's
data. For example, if the road layout or the
direction of a one-way street has been
changed.
For this reason, you must always observe
road and traffic rules and regulations during
your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
ulations always have priority over the sys-
tem's driving recommendations.
Navigation
Example: preparation phase

Route guidance begins once a route has been
: Next road
calculated (Y page 69).
; Point at which the change of direction
COMAND guides you to your destination by
takes place (light blue dot)
means of navigation announcements in the
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
form of audible navigation announcements
and route guidance displays. angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
The route guidance displays can be seen if the
? Current road
display is switched to navigation mode.
If you do not follow the navigation announce- Display ? depends on the setting selected
ments or if you leave the calculated route, for "Map information in the display"
COMAND automatically calculates a new (Y page 111).
route to the destination. COMAND prepares you for the upcoming
If the digital map contains the corresponding change of direction. Based on the example
information, the following applies: display below, the change of direction is
announced by the Prepare to turn right
Rduring route guidance, COMAND tries to message. You see the full-screen map.
avoid roads with restricted access. Those
roads, for example, that are closed to
through-traffic.
Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g.
closed on Sundays and public holidays) are
considered for route guidance on days
when they are open. For this purpose, the
relevant times must be correctly stored in
the database.
Displays during route guidance Example: announcement phase

Change of direction : Next road
; Change of direction (turn right here)
Changes of direction have three phases:
= Graphic representation of the distance to
Rpreparation phase the next change of direction
Rannouncement phase ? Distance to the next change of direction
Rchange-of-direction phase
Route guidance 89
A Route (highlighted in blue, shown in both Based on the example display below, the
the left and right displays) change of direction is announced 150 ft
B Point at which the change of direction before the change of direction with the Now
takes place (light blue dot, shown in both turn right message.
the left and right displays) The display is split into two halves, as in the
announcement phase.
i The filled-in section of visual display for
distance = gets shorter the nearer you get Once the change of direction is completed,
to the announced change of direction. COMAND automatically switches back to full-
screen display.
COMAND announces the imminent change of
direction. Based on the example display Example of a display without changes of
Navigation
below, the change of direction is announced direction
beforehand by the message: Please turn
right in 500 ft. and follow the
<road name>.
name>
The distance announced before the next
change of direction depends on the type of
road and its permissible maximum speed.
The display is now split into two sectors. In
the left half, you see the normal map view.
The right-hand half shows:
Ran enlarged section of the area around the
intersection (crossing zoom) or
Ra 3D image of the road's course with the
: Route (highlighted in blue)
route indicating the next change of direc- ; Current vehicle position
tion = Current road
? Map orientation selected
A Map scale selected
Lane recommendations
Example: change-of-direction phase

: Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
; Graphic representation of the distance to Example: lane recommendations
the next change of direction : Point of the next change of direction
= Distance to the next change of direction ; Point of the change of direction after next
COMAND announces the imminent change of = Next change of direction (in this case, turn
direction. off to the right)
Z
90 Route guidance
? Graphic representation of the distance to Display and description of lane recom-

the next change of direction mendations
A Distance to the next change of direction Lane Day Night
B Possible lane (light blue) mode mode
C Recommended lane (dark blue)
D Lane not recommended (gray) Recommended lane Dark Light
E Current vehicle position, the tip of the tri- In this lane, you will blue blue
angle indicating the vehicle’s direction of be able to complete
travel the next two
changes of direction
On multi-lane roads, COMAND can display
Navigation
without changing
lane recommendations for the next change of lanes.
direction. The corresponding data must be
available in the digital map. Possible lane Light Dark
COMAND displays lane recommendation C In this lane, you will blue blue
based on the next two changes of direction. only be able to com-
The number of lanes applies to the point at plete the next
which the next change of direction is change of direction
required. without changing
lanes.
i The multifunction display also shows lane
recommendations. Lane not recom- Light Gray
Only the recommended lanes are displayed mended brown or
here, see the separate vehicle Operator's In this lane, you will light gray
Manual. not be able to com-
plete the next
change of direction
without changing
lanes.
i The colors used in the lane recommenda-

tion display vary depending on whether day
or night mode is switched on.
Route guidance 91
HOV or carpool lanes X Select RPT in the navigation system menu

bar by turning cVd the COMAND control-
ler and press W to confirm.
Switching navigation announcements

on/off
X To switch off: press the 8 button dur-
ing an announcement.
You will briefly see the message: The
driving instructions have been
Navigation
muted.
: HOV symbol on the road sign X To switch on: press W the COMAND con-
; HOV symbol on the car pool lane troller.
A route may be calculated taking the use of XSelect RPT in the navigation system menu
HOV or carpool lanes into account. You can bar by turning cVd the COMAND control-
use HOV or carpool lanes depending on the ler and press W to confirm.
number of persons in the vehicle as well as i COMAND automatically switches the nav-
the local and time limitation conditions. igation announcements back on when:
i This information is stored in the map data. Ryou have a new route calculated
i You can enter the number of people in the Ryou switch COMAND on again or start the
vehicle (Y page 62). In this section, you can engine
also find more information on HOV or car-
pool lanes. Switching announcements and audio
fadeout on/off
If the system guides you to or from a carpool
lane, COMAND provides you with visual and X Select Navi in the main function bar by
acoustic driving instructions. sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
X Select Announcements and press W to
Navigation announcements confirm.
Repeating navigation announcements A menu appears.
You can activate/deactivate the following
Navigation announcements are intended to functions:
direct you while driving without diverting your
RAnnounce Street Names
attention from the road and driving. Please
always use this feature instead of consulting Street names are announced during
the map display for directions. The symbols or route guidance.
the map display could distract you from traffic RAudible Info During Phone Call
conditions and driving. During a phone call, navigation
If you have missed an announcement, you can announcements and traffic reports are
call up the current announcement at any audible in the background.
time. RAudio Fadeout
controller.
Z
92 Route guidance
The volume of an active audio or video Exit route guidance

source is automatically reduced during a
navigation announcement. Canceling or continuing route guidance
RGas on Reserve X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Once you have reached reserve fuel Ø button.
level, you will see a prompt asking X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
whether you wish to start the search for a controller.
gas station (Y page 76). X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
X Select the function and press W to confirm. tem menu bar by turning cVd the
Switch the function on O or off ª. COMAND controller and press W to con-
Navigation
firm.
Setting the volume manually X To cancel route guidance: select Cancel
X Adjust the volume using the q control Route Guidance and press W to confirm.
knob during a navigation announcement. or
or X To continue route guidance: select Con‐
X Select RPT in the map view with the menu tinue Route Guidance and press W to
shown and adjust the volume using the q confirm.
control knob. COMAND calculates the route.
Announce Street Names Destination or area of destination

reached
If the function is switched on, the name of the
street which you are turning into is When you reach your destination, COMAND
announced. displays a checkered flag and route guidance
Announcements are not made in the chosen is automatically ended.
language in all countries. They are made when If the destination is not in close proximity to a
relevant street names for the selected lan- digitized street, the Area of destination
guage are available in the database. reached message appears when the desti-
X To switch to navigation mode: press the nation is reached.
Ø button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND Influencing route guidance
controller.
Avoiding a section of the route blocked
X Select Navi in the main function bar by by a traffic jam
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm. This function blocks a section of the route
ahead of you. You can set the length of the
X Select Announce Street Names and press
blocked route section. If possible, COMAND
W to confirm.
calculates a detour around the blocked sec-
tion of the route.
Ø button.
controller.
Route guidance 93
X Select Route in the navigation system X Select Alternative Route and press W
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND to confirm.
X Select Detour and press W to confirm.
X To block a section of the route: select
Longer or Shorter repeatedly and press
W to confirm until the desired section has
been selected.
i The total length of the section that can be
blocked is defined by the digital map. The
Navigation
menu items are available accordingly.
X To delete the blocked section: select
Delete while the message is shown and
press W to confirm.
COMAND calculates the route without the
block.
Selecting an alternative route

With the "Alternative Route" function, routes
other than the original one can be calculated.
Routes 1 to 3 are calculated with the current Examples for route 1 (above) and route 4 (eco
settings for the route type and route options route)
and are shown with a dark blue line Option 2
(Y page 62). X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Route 4 is the economic route (eco route) and Ø button.
is shown with a green line.
On the right-hand side, you will see informa-
controller.
tion on the currently selected alternative
route, e.g. distance, estimated remaining X Select Navi in the main function bar by
driving time and estimated time of arrival. sliding ZV the COMAND controller and
Route sections used (e.g. highways, tunnels) press W to confirm.
are displayed as symbols. X Select Calculate Alternative Route
Option 1 and press W to confirm.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the The function is switched on O or off ª,
Ø button. depending on the previous status.
Function is activated: alternative routes
are calculated directly after the destination
controller.
is entered.
X Select Route in the navigation system
Z
94 Route guidance
Menu functions X To close the destination information:

X To select the next or previous alterna- slide XVY the COMAND controller or press
tive route: select Next or Previous and the k back button.
press W to confirm. i You can display destination information
X To start route guidance using the selec- for the destination, for both way points and
ted alternative route: select Start and for the intermediate stop, if they are part of
press W to confirm. the route.
COMAND begins route guidance on the If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND
selected alternative route. and a phone number is included in the des-
tination information, you can call it
Navigation
(Y page 126).
Route information
Route overview
Displaying destination information
You can use the route overview to move along
the active route section by section and view
information and details about each section of
the route.
You can see information relevant to the sec-
tion of the route, such as the length of the
road section you will be driving along and the
road name. The highlighted route section is
marked in white with a red border on the map.
Ø button.
Example: destination information X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
The example shows information on distance, controller.
estimated time of arrival and estimated
remaining driving time to the destination O
X Select Route in the navigation system
and two way points. menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
Ø button. X Select Route Browser and press W to
confirm.
controller. X To view the next or previous route sec-
tion: select Next or Previous and press W
X Select Route in the navigation system to confirm.
i If the first or last route section is high-
lighted, you cannot select Previous or
X Select Destination Information and Next.
Next
press W to confirm. X To zoom in or out of the map: select N or
Destination information is displayed. M and press W to confirm.
X To call up further destination informa- X To close the route overview: select Back
tion: turn cVd the COMAND controller. and press W to confirm.
Route guidance 95
Route demonstration
Navigation
Example: route display stopped
: Road name and city display when route
You can see the route before starting your display has been stopped
journey. This function is only available when
; Distance of the crosshair from current
the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle position
X To get to the current vehicle position:
Ø button.
press W to confirm the symbol for the cur-
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND rent vehicle position.
controller. X To change the map scale: select Scale
X Select Route in the navigation system and press W to confirm.
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND The scale bar appears.
controller and press W to confirm. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
X Select Route Demonstration and press press W to confirm.
W to confirm.
The map with the crosshair appears.
Recording the route
X To get to the destination: press W to
confirm the highlighted symbol. Notes
X To stop the route demonstration: con- If you have activated COMAND and the SD
firm the Ë symbol by pressing W. memory card has been inserted, you should
not take it out of the slot.
You can store up to 100 routes.
When you record a route, COMAND uses so-
called support points and displays the route
as a series of lines. If the route is then calcu-
lated, COMAND attempts to align the recor-
ded route with the digital map.
The support points of the route may not be on
a digitized road.
This is often the case for routes that have
been calculated using map data from other
sources.
Z
96 Route guidance
Calling up the Routes menu X To end recording: select Stop Recording

in the Routes menu by turning cVd the
firm.
Displaying and editing the recorded

route
Navigation

Ø button.
controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation sys- X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
tem menu bar by turning cVd the X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 96).
X Select List in the Routes menu by turning
firm.
X Select Routes
Routes. to confirm.
Previously recorded routes are displayed.
Starting/ending recording
X Select a route and press W to confirm.

X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 96). The map appears with a menu. The recor-
X To start recording : select Start ded route is shown in the map with a blue
Recording in the Routes menu by turning dotted line.
cVd the COMAND controller and press W X To view a demonstration of the route on
to confirm. the map: select Demo by turning cVd the
During the recording, the recorded route is
shown behind the current vehicle position
with gray strokes (symbol for tire tracks).
Route guidance 97
COMAND controller and press W to con- X To delete a route: select Delete in the
firm. menu by turning cVd the COMAND con-
The map with the crosshair appears. troller and press W to confirm.
X Proceed as described in the "Route dem- A prompt appears asking whether the route
onstration" section (Y page 95). should be deleted.
X To begin route calculation: select Start
If you select Yes
Yes, the route will be deleted.
in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm. If you select No
COMAND attempts to align the recorded celed.
route with the digital map.
Navigation
Scanning the memory
The SD memory card is inserted.
X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 96).
X Select Memory Info in the Routes menu by
press W to confirm.
A message such as Off-road Route Mem‐
ory 90% Full. is displayed.
Changing route names and icons Off-road and off-map

X Select Edit in the menu by turning cVd Notes
The navigation system may guide you to off-
confirm.
road routes that your vehicle cannot drive on
X To change the route name: select Rename without causing damage to the tires or wheels
and press W to confirm. or the vehicle itself. It is the driver’s sole
i The name cannot be changed while the responsibility to determine the suitability of
vehicle is in motion. the route. The condition of the off-road routes
may vary, and their drivability may be affected
X To change the icon: select Change Icon
by different factors such as time of day, sea-
and press W to confirm. son and current weather conditions, which
Observe the further information on managing the navigation system cannot judge or take
categories for personal POIs (Y page 83). into account.
To change direction for route calculation:
you can set the icon for the route to the start-
ing point or to the destination, thereby chang-
ing the direction for route calculation.
During route calculation, one-way streets or
turn restrictions, for example, are taken into
account. Therefore, the outward and return
routes may differ from each other.
X Select Swap in the menu by turning cVd
confirm.
Z
98 Route guidance
Route guidance to a destination that is COMAND is also able to guide you to a des-
not on a digitized road tination even from an off-road location.
At the start of route guidance, you will see the
Off Mapped Road message, an arrow and
the distance to the destination. The arrow
shows the compass heading to the actual
destination.
The route is highlighted blue, starting from
the last recognized street the vehicle was on
before it left the map.
Navigation
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road

known to the system, route guidance contin-
ues in the usual way.
Example: route guidance to an off-road destination
: Off-road destination Route guidance from an off-map loca-
; Off-road route section (blue dashes) tion to a destination
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
If the vehicle position is outside the area cov-
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
ered by the digital map, then the vehicle is in
travel)
an off-map location. COMAND is also able to
? Off-road (if available)
guide you to a destination even from an off-
COMAND can guide you to destinations map location.
which are within the area of the digital map, At the start of route guidance, you will see the
but which are not themselves recorded on the Off Mapped Road message, an arrow and
map. the distance to the destination. The direction
These destinations are known as off-road arrow shows the compass heading to the des-
destinations, which you can enter using the tination.
map, for example. In these cases, COMAND The route is highlighted in blue from the near-
guides you for as long as possible with navi- est road known to the system.
gation announcements and displays on roads As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system. known to the system, route guidance contin-
If the vehicle reaches an area which is not part ues in the usual way.
of the digital map, the display appears as a
split-screen view. On the right, an arrow Off-road during route guidance
appears that points to off-road destina-
tion :. You will hear the announcement: Due to road works, for example, there may be
"Please follow the arrow on the display". As differences between the data on the digital
the vehicle approaches the destination, the map and the actual course of the road.
Area of destination reached message In such cases, the system will temporarily be
appears. unable to locate the vehicle position on the
digital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off-
Route guidance from an off-road loca- road position.
tion to a destination In the display, you will see the Off Mapped
Road message, an arrow and the distance to
If the vehicle position is within the area cov-
the destination. The direction arrow shows
ered by the digital map, but the map does not
the compass heading to the destination.
contain any information about that location,
the vehicle is in an off-road location.
Traffic reports 99
As soon as the system can assign the vehicle X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
position to the map again, route guidance controller and, when the Full Screen
continues in the usual way. menu item is shown, press W to confirm.
The map can be seen in the full-screen dis-
play.
Traffic reports
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller until the
Prerequisites desired map scale is set.
i This function is currently not available for
Canada.
Navigation
To receive real-time traffic reports via satel-
lite radio, you require:
Roptional satellite radio equipment
Ra subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio
Traffic Message Service
Further information on satellite radio
(Y page 190).
COMAND can receive traffic reports via sat-
ellite radio and take account of these for
route guidance in the navigation system.
Received traffic reports are displayed on the
map either as text or as symbols.
Real-time traffic reports on the map
: Delimits the section of the route affected

; Indicates an incident on the route (traffic
flow)
= Destination
? Map scale
COMAND can show certain traffic incidents
on the map. Traffic reports are shown on the
map at scales of 0.05 mi to 20 mi.
Z
100 Traffic reports
Symbols used in real-time traffic reports

Unimpeded traffic flow
Green line with arrows
The arrows can be seen on a map scale of 200 m (0.25 mi) and smaller.
Heavy/slow-moving traffic
Together with a yellow line
The symbol marks average speeds of 25 – 45 mph (40 – 72 km/h).
Caution, traffic incident
Navigation
Traffic jam
Together with a red line and arrows
The symbol marks average speeds of 5 - 20 mph (8 - 32 km/h).
Warning message
Together with a red/white striped line and arrows
Blocked route section
Possibly in combination with X X X X
Displaying real-time traffic reports Traffic symbol information

Starting a search for traffic reports
Ø button.
controller.
X Select Traffic by turning cVd the
firm.
A menu appears.
If No Traffic Messages appears, this Example display
means either: : Affected roads with indication of direction
Rno traffic reports have been received yet, ; Symbol for report type, e.g. traffic flow
or message
Rno traffic reports are available. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
X To end the search: select Cancel and Ø button.
press W to confirm. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
X To close the report window: select OK controller.
Traffic reports 101
X Select Traffic in the navigation system Displaying reports on the route

X Select Traffic Symbol Information by
press W to confirm.
X Select Next or Previous by turning cVd
confirm in order to continue highlighting
traffic symbols.
Navigation
X To change the map scale: select Map by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and : State/province for the calculated route,
press W to confirm. road designation, direction and reports
You can now zoom in or out of the map. for the affected road (2/3)
; Section of the road to which the traffic
report applies
= Traffic report
? Type of traffic report (slow-moving traffic)
Ø button.
controller.
X Select Traffic in the navigation system
Example: details on traffic symbol information menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
X To show the detailed view: select
X Select Messages On Route and press W
Details and press W to confirm.
to confirm.
X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the
The traffic report window appears. If there
COMAND controller.
is more than one traffic report for a section
of the route, this is indicated by 2/3, for
example.
X To scroll within a report or to access the
next report: turn c Vd the COMAND con-
troller.
X To return to the report list: slide XVY the
COMAND controller.
Z
102 Traffic reports
Displaying all traffic reports You can select the following text reader prop-
erties:
RLanguage (Y page 45)
RText reader speed (Y page 44)
You can start the text reader function man-
ually or set it to automatic.
Starting the text reader function man-

ually
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Navigation
X
Ø button.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
Ø button. controller.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND X Select Traffic by turning cVd the
controller. COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
X Select Traffic in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND X Select Read out all messages on
controller and press W to confirm. route and press W to confirm.

COMAND reads out the reports in
X Select All Messages and press W to con- sequence.
firm.
i If there are no reports for the route, the
A list is shown containing all roads, areas or
Read out all messages on route menu
regions affected by traffic reports. Roads,
item is shown in gray and cannot be selec-
areas or regions not on the route also
ted.
appear in the list.
X To switch off the read-aloud function:
X To show a traffic report: select a road, select Cancel Read-Aloud Function and
area or region and press W to confirm. press W to confirm or press the 8 but-
The traffic report is displayed. There may be ton.
several traffic reports for the affected road. COMAND reads out the current report and
You can find an example of a traffic report then exits the read-aloud function.
here: (Y page 101).
X To close a report: slide XVY the COMAND Automatic read-aloud function
controller.
Ø button.
Reading out traffic reports on the X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
route controller.
X Select Traffic by sliding ZV and turning
Introduction
c V d the COMAND controller and press W
The read-aloud function is only available while to confirm.
route guidance is active. It reads out traffic X Select Read Traffic Messages Auto‐
reports affecting the current route. matically and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
the option on O or off ª.
Destination memory 103
Recalculating the route dynamically X To change the home address: select

Change in the menu showing the home
address by turning cVd the COMAND con-
X Confirm New Entry by pressing W.
X In both cases, enter the home address as a
destination, e.g. as a city, street and house
number (Y page 64). Then, save the home
address (Y page 69).
Navigation
Adopting an address book entry as a
home address
The route types Dynamic Route and
Dynamic Route Only After Request take
all relevant traffic messages into account Ø button.
when calculating a route (Y page 62). X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
If you have selected Dynamic Route as the controller.
route type, COMAND guides you to your des- X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
tination along the updated route. tem menu bar by turning cVd the
If you have selected Dynamic Route Only COMAND controller and press W to con-
After Request as the route type, a prompt firm.
will appear first.
X Select From Memory and press W to con-
You can now decide whether to: firm.
Raccept the route suggested by COMAND You will see the destination memory list
Rcontinue your original route either with the character bar (option 1) or
X To accept the suggested route: press W
as a selection list (option 2).
the COMAND controller. Option 1: destination memory list with
X To continue along the original route: character bar
select Reject by turning cVd the
firm.
Destination memory
Home address (My Address)
Entering the home address via address
entry
X Proceed as described under “Adopting an X Slide VZ the COMAND controller repeat-
address book entry as a home address” edly until the destination memory list
(Y page 103). Confirm My Address by appears as a selection list.
pressing W. Option 2: destination memory list as
X To enter the home address for the first selection list
time: confirm New Entry by pressing W.
Z
104 Destination memory
then save the home address without having

to start route guidance.
X Select Home
Home, Work or Not Classified and
press W to confirm.
In both cases, you will see the address book
either with the character bar or as a selec-
tion list.
X Select an address book entry
(Y page 148).
X To confirm the selection: press W the
Navigation
The My Address entry is listed as the first COMAND controller.

entry in the destination memory. If there is no existing home address,
X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND saves the entry. You will see a
COMAND controller and press W to con- message and then the address menu with
firm. the selected address. Start is highlighted
automatically.
i If you have not yet entered any charac-
ters, My Address is automatically highligh- If a home address has already been stored,
ted in the selection list. you will see a prompt asking you whether
the My Address entry should be overwrit-
If no home address has been stored yet, you
ten.
can now assign an address book entry. If a
home address already exists, it is displayed X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
and you can alter it. If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND overwrites the
i If you select New Entry,
Entry you are also destination. You will see a message and
offered the option of entering the home then the address menu with the selected
address for the first time. You can then address. Start is highlighted automati-
save the home address without having to cally.
start route guidance. If you select No
No, the list will appear again.
X To enter the home address for the first
time: select Assign to Address Book Selecting the home address for route
Entry and press W to confirm. guidance
X Select Home
Home, Work or Not Classified and X Proceed as described under "Selecting a
press W to confirm. destination from the destination memory"
(Y page 70).
X To change the home address: select
Change and press W to confirm.
X Select Assign to Address Book Entry
Saving a destination
i If you select New Entry,
Entry you are also General notes
offered the option of changing the home This function also stores the destination in
address by entering an address. You can the address book.
When the address book is full, no destinations
can be saved in the destination memory. You
must first delete address book entries
(Y page 148).
Destination memory 105
After destination entry Selecting storing options

X The destination has been entered and is Once you have chosen one of the following
shown in the address entry menu options for storing a destination, you can
(Y page 64). specify storage options:
X Select Save by sliding VÆ and turning RAfterdestination entry (Y page 105)
cVd the COMAND controller and press W RDuring route guidance (Y page 105)
to confirm.
RFrom the list of previous destinations
You can now select storing options
(Y page 70)
(Y page 105).
Navigation
During route guidance
controller.
firm.
X Select Save Destination and press W to
confirm. Storage options
You can now select storing options X To save the destination without a name:
(Y page 105). select Save Without Name and press W to
confirm.
From the list of previous destinations COMAND stores the destination in the des-
tination memory and uses the address as
the destination name.
controller.
firm.
X Select From Last Destinations and
press W to confirm.
The list of last destinations appears.
X Select a destination by turning cVd the
firm. Example: saving a destination with a name
The destination address is shown. : Selected data field with cursor
X Select Save and press W to confirm. ; Character bar
You can now select storing options X To save the destination with a name:
(Y page 105).
select Save With Name and press W to
confirm.
Z
106 Destination memory
X Select a category, e.g. Home

Home, and press W asking whether you wish to overwrite the
to confirm. existing data.
The input menu appears with data fields X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
and the character bar. If you select Yes
Yes, the entry is overwritten. If
X Proceed as described under "Character you select No
No, the process will be canceled.
entry (navigation)" (Y page 35). X To save the destination as a personal
X Then select ¬ and press W to confirm. POI: insert the SD memory card
COMAND stores the destination under the (Y page 196).
name entered. X Select Save As Personal POI and press
An address with complete address data that W to confirm.
Navigation
is suitable for navigation can be assigned to a X Select a category.

pre-existing address book entry. X Enter the name.
X To assign an address to an address The current address is saved as a personal
book entry: select Assign to Address point of interest on the SD memory card.
Book Entry and press W to confirm.
X Select a category, e.g. Home
Home, and press W
to confirm. Deleting a destination or the home
You will see the address book either with address
the character bar or as a selection list. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
X Select an address book entry Ø button.
(Y page 148). X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
COMAND stores the data if the address controller.
book entry selected does not yet contain
navigable address data. X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
If the selected address book entry already
contains navigable address data, a prompt
firm.
will appear asking whether you wish to
overwrite the existing data. X Select From Memory and press W to con-
firm.
You will see the destination memory list
If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND stores the data.
either with the character bar (option 1) or
You can now start route guidance to this as a selection list (option 2).
address directly from the address book
(Y page 150). X Option 1: destination memory list with
the character bar: enter characters using
X To save the destination as My address: the character bar (Y page 35).
select Save as "My Address" and press
W to confirm. X Option 2: destination memory list as
COMAND stores the destination in the des- selection list: select a destination by turn-
tination memory as My Address.
Address If the ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
selected address book entry already con- W to confirm.
tains address data that can be used for You see the address data of the selected
navigation (L icon), a prompt will appear entry.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
to delete the destination.
Previous destinations 107
XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm. X Select Position in the navigation system
If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND deletes the menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
destination. You will see a message to this controller and press W to confirm.
effect. X Select Save Vehicle Position and press
If you select No
No, the process will be can- W to confirm.
celed. COMAND stores the current vehicle posi-
i If the navigable address data for the des- tion as a destination in the list of previous
tination being deleted is also assigned to an destinations.
address book entry, COMAND will also
delete this data from there. If the corre-
Storing the crosshair position in the
Navigation
sponding address book entry does not con-
tain any further data, such as telephone list of previous destinations
numbers, COMAND deletes the entire A crosshair appears on the map if you have
address book entry. moved the map manually (Y page 108). You
can store the crosshair position as a destina-
tion in the list of previous destinations.
Previous destinations
Introduction controller.
COMAND automatically stores the previous X Select Position in the navigation system
destinations for which route calculation has menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
been started. If the memory is full, COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
deletes the oldest destination. You can also X Select Save Crosshair Position and
save a destination from the list of previous press W to confirm.
destinations in the destination memory. It will
be stored there permanently.
Deleting one of the previous destina-
tions
Storing a destination permanently in
the destination memory X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
X Proceed as described in the "From the list X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
of previous destinations" section
controller.
(Y page 70).
Storing the vehicle position in the list
firm.
of previous destinations
X Select From Last Destinations and
X To switch on navigation mode: press the press W to confirm.
Ø function button. The list of last destinations appears.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND X Select the desired destination and press W
controller. to confirm.
The destination address appears.
Z
108 Map operation and map settings
X Select Delete and press W to confirm. Moving the map

A prompt appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted. Showing the crosshair
If you select Yes
Yes, the entry is deleted.
If you select No
celed.
Map operation and map settings

Navigation
General notes
Company logos displayed on the map are
trademarks of the respective companies and
Map with crosshair
used solely for the purpose of indicating the
: Current vehicle position
locations of these companies. The use of such
logos on the map does not indicate approval ; Crosshair
of, support of or advertising by these compa- = Details of the crosshair position
nies for the navigation system itself. ? Map scale selected
controller and, when the Full Screen
Setting the map scale menu item is shown, press W.
X To scroll the weather map: slide XVY,
ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller.
A crosshair appears on the map. If you slide
it again, the map under the crosshair moves
in the corresponding direction.
Display = may be the name of a street, for
: Set map scale as a number with unit example, provided the digital map contains
; Currently set map scale as indicated by the necessary data. It shows the geo-coordi-
the needle on the scale bar nate position of the crosshair if the Geo-
= New map scale coordinates display is switched on
(Y page 111).
? Scale bar
Unit of measurement : in the COMAND dis- Hiding the crosshair and centering the
play depends on the selection made in the map on the vehicle position or destina-
instrument cluster; see the separate vehicle tion
Operator's Manual.
X Press the % back button twice.
The crosshair disappears and the map is
controller and, when the Full Screen set to the vehicle position.
menu item is shown, press W.
X To call up the scale bar: as soon as you
turn cVd the COMAND controller, scale
bar = appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
Map operation and map settings 109
Centering the map on the vehicle's posi- Map orientation

tion
controller.
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
confirm. Example: map orientation
X Select Vehicle Position Map and press : Current map orientation (0 or ¤)
Navigation
W to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown, Possible map orientations:
press the % back button.
This hides the crosshair. R0 North orientation (The map view is dis-
played so that north is always up)
R¤ Heading orientation (the map view is
Centering the map on the destination
position aligned to the direction of travel. The direc-
tion of travel is always at the top, the
This function requires a calculated route to a orange-color tip of the symbol points
destination. If the route includes way points north.)
and an intermediate stop, the map can also be R¤ Bird's-eye view (the map view is aligned
set to these positions. to the direction of travel. The map projec-
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND tion reproduces the curvature of the earth's
controller. surface, the orange-color tip of the symbol
points north.)
R¤ 3D map (the map view is aligned to the
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to direction of travel. At a scale of 1 km the
confirm. map displays elevation, the orange-color
tip of the symbol points north.)
X Select Destination Position Map and
press W to confirm.
The crosshair position is set to the relevant
destination.
Map settings
Calling up the map settings menu
controller.
Map orientation menu
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND Setting the map orientation
controller and press W to confirm. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
X Select Map Settings and press W to con- controller.
firm.
The map settings menu appears.
Z
X Select Navi in the main function bar by Symbol display determined by the factory
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND settings.
controller and press W to confirm. RPersonal Symbols
X Select Map Settings and press W to con- You can determine the symbols yourself.
firm. RNo Symbols
The map settings menu appears. The map does not show any symbols.
X Select Map Orientation and press W to
confirm.
X Select North Up,
Up Heading Up,
Up Bird's-
eye View or 3-D Map by turning cVd the
Navigation

firm.
A # dot indicates the new setting.
Selecting POI symbols
X Select Default Symbols

Symbols, Personal Sym‐
bols or No Symbols.
Symbols
If you select Personal Symbols,
Symbols the POI
list appears.
X To switch the symbol display on/off:
select a POI by turning cVd the COMAND
Depending on the previous state of the
symbols, they will either be shown O or
Setting the POI symbol display hidden ª. You can switch on the symbol
displays for more than one point of interest.
You can set the points of interest you wish to
X To switch all personal symbols on/off:
have displayed as symbols on the map. Points
of interest are, for example, gas stations, select All and press W to confirm.
hotels, cinemas and restaurants. Depending on the previous status of the
symbols, they will either be shown O or
hidden ª.
controller.
If the function is switched on O, the indi-
X Select Navi in the main function bar by vidual POIs are grayed out and the previ-
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND ously selected settings remain unchanged.
controller and press W to confirm. If the function is switched off ª, you can
X Select Map Settings and press W to con- reselect the individual POIs. They show the
firm. most recently selected settings.
The map settings menu appears. i The list shows all symbols that are con-
tained on the digital map across all coun-
X Select POI Symbols On Map and press W
tries. However, not all points of interest are
to confirm.
available in all countries. As a result, certain
The following settings are possible: point of interest symbols may not be dis-
RDefault Symbols
played on the map, even if the symbol dis-

play is switched on.
button.
Selecting map information

Map information in the display Geo-coordinate display
During route guidance, you can have map : Current height above average sea level
information shown at the bottom edge of the (rounded to the nearest 10 m)
display. ; Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-
Navigation
nates
controller. = Current vehicle position: longitude coor-
dinates
? Number of GPS satellites currently being
controller and press W to confirm. used
X Select Map Settings and press W to con- There must be sufficient GPS reception for all
firm. displays to be shown. If this is not the case,
The map settings menu appears. the display will be grayed out. Height dis-
X Select Text Information On Map and
play : may vary from the actual value,
press W to confirm. because the navigation system uses the GPS
A # dot indicates the current setting. signals for the calculation.
During the "Move map" function, you will see
X Select Current Street,
Street Geo-coordi‐ the geo-coordinates of the crosshair position.
nates or None and press W to confirm. Height display : and number of satellites
X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND used ? are not displayed.
controller.
Display switched off

Road display : Current map orientation
: Road names or numbers, e.g. for high- While moving the map, you will see additional
ways data, depending on the crosshair position, if
the digital map supports this data. A street
name, for example, can be shown here
(Y page 108).
Coordinates on the map

controller.
Z

X Select Map Settings and press W to con-
firm.
X Select Compass On Map and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
Navigation
X Select Never
Never, When Off-Road or When Example: highway information
Route Guidance Inactive and press W
to confirm. Switching highway information on/off
The selected setting is accepted. When driving on the highway, you can see the
following information on the right of the dis-
Switching additional information play:
on/off Rthe nearest gas stations
Switching the topographic map on/off Rthe nearest rest areas, etc.
Rand their distance from the current vehicle
position
controller.
The entries show the number of the high-
X Select Navi in the main function bar by way and the highway exits as well as their
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND distance from the current vehicle position.
controller and press W to confirm. The name of the highway exit continues to
X Select Map Settings and press W to con- be displayed.
firm. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
The map settings menu appears. Ø button.
X Select Topographic Map and press W to X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
confirm. controller.
Depending on the previous status, switch
The topographical map uses different colors controller and press W to confirm.
to depict elevation. The color key generally
reflects the topography's dominant vegeta- X Select Map Settings and press W to con-
tion or the ground's perceived color when firm.
seen from the air, for example: The map settings menu appears.
Rgreen (grass) for lowland X Select Highway Information and press
Ryellow, brown (woodland) for hills
W to confirm.
Rgray (stone) and white (snow) for moun-
tains
Navigation
Example: city model
Switching city view on/off
When the city model is switched on, the map
shows buildings in 3D.
controller.
X Select Map Settings and press W to con- Example: intersecting roads on city routes/high-
firm. ways
The map settings menu appears. Showing/hiding intersecting streets
X Select City (3D) and press W to confirm. If route guidance is inactive, intersecting
Depending on the previous status, switch streets can be shown on the upper edge of the
the option on O or off ª. display.
i The city model is only shown for "Bird's-
eye View" or "3D Map". controller.
It is available in the 0.05 mi and 0.1 mi map X Select Navi in the main function bar by
scales. sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
The data required for displaying buildings is controller and press W to confirm.
not available for all cities. X Select Map Settings and press W to con-
firm.
X Select Next Intersecting Street and
press W to confirm.
Z
114 Additional settings
Traffic information on the map Traffic Display on the map

information
Incidents Road sections with traffic
incidents are illustrated
with a yellow line and
arrows.
Speed & Road sections with traffic
Flow jams are represented by yel-
low or red lines.
Navigation
Yellow lines: traffic jams,

average speed 25 - 45 mph
: Delimits the section of the route affected (40 - 72 km/h)
; Indicates an incident on the route (traffic
Red lines: traffic jams, aver-
flow) age speed 5 - 20 mph
If you subscribe to the SIRIUS XM Satellite (8 - 32 km/h)
Radio Traffic Message Service, traffic infor-
mation can be displayed on the map. You can Free Flow Free flowing road sections
select three categories for the display. are illustrated with a green
line and arrows.
X To switch the display on/off: press W
the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by Additional settings
controller and press W to confirm. Avoiding an area
X Select Traffic Information On Map and General information
press W to confirm. COMAND enables you to avoid areas you do
X Select Incidents and/or Speed & Flow not wish to drive through.
and/or Free Flow and press W to con- If you activate or deactivate a route block
firm. while route guidance is active, COMAND will
Depending on the previous status, switch calculate a new route. If you activate or deac-
the option on O or off ª. tivate a route block while route guidance is
inactive, COMAND will use the new setting for
the next route guidance.
The calculated route may include an area to
be avoided if:
Ryour destination is located in such an area.
Rthe route uses roads that lead through an
area to be avoided.
i Highways within blocked areas are always
taken into consideration in the route cal-
culation.
Additional settings 115
Defining an area for the first time X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar
appears. Turning clockwise zooms out from
Ø button.
the map; turning counter-clockwise zooms
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND in.
controller. X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by X To apply a block: press W the COMAND
controller.
A red square appears on the map.
X Select Avoid Area and press W to con-
Navigation
firm.
If you have not previously blocked an area,
a menu appears.
X To adjust the size of the square: turn

cVd the COMAND controller.
The square is enlarged or reduced.
X To confirm the settings: press W.
X Select Using Map,
Map From Memory or From
The list appears. The previously selected
Personal POIs and press W to confirm.
area to be avoided has been added and
If you select Using Map,
Map the map with the
activated.
crosshair appears.
If you select From Memory or From Per‐ You can also determine additional areas to be
sonal POIs,
POIs either the destination mem- avoided (Y page 115).
ory or the list of categories for POIs
appears. Defining further areas
RDestination memory (Y page 70) X To switch to navigation mode: press the
RList of categories for personal POIs Ø button.
(Y page 85) X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
X Select the desired destination or personal
controller.
POI and press W to confirm.
X When the destination address is displayed,
select Continue and press W to confirm. sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
The map appears. controller and press W to confirm.
The crosshair marks the center of the area X Select Avoid Area and press W to con-
that is to be avoided. firm.
If you have already selected one or more
X To scroll the weather map: slide XVY,
areas to avoid, a list of areas appears.
ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller.
Z
X To avoid a new area: call up the area menu

again (Y page 115).
Switching an avoided area on/off

X Call up the area list (Y page 115).
X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
confirm.
The avoided area is switched on O or off
ª depending on the previous status.
Navigation
Example: list of areas

i Available positions in the list are named Displaying and changing an avoided
Empty and are shown in grey. area
X Select Avoid New Area by turning cVd X Call up the area list (Y page 115).
confirm.
A menu appears.
X Slide VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Display / Change and press W to
confirm.
The area to be avoided is indicated in the
map.
X To change the location of the area: slide
XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND control-
ler.
The area is moved on the map.
X To adjust the size of the area: turn cVd
X Select Using Map,
Map From Memory or From
Personal POIs and press W to confirm. the COMAND controller.
If you select Using Map,
Map the map with the The area is enlarged or reduced.
crosshair appears. X To confirm the change: press W the
If you select From Memory or From Per‐ COMAND controller.
sonal POIs,
POIs either the destination mem- The list appears and the change is entered.
ory or the list of categories for POIs
appears. Deleting a set area
RDestination memory (Y page 70)
X Call up the area list (Y page 115).
RList of categories for personal POIs
(Y page 85)
X Select the desired destination or personal
X Slide VY the COMAND controller and
POI and press W to confirm.
press W to confirm.
X When the destination address is displayed,
select Continue and press W to confirm.
A query appears asking whether the entry
The map appears.
should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No
No. Compass function
If you select Yes
Yes, the entry is deleted.
You can view the current direction of travel,
If you select No
the current height and the coordinates of the
celed.
current vehicle position in the compass view.
SIRIUS XM service Ø button.

Displaying SIRIUS XM service informa-
controller.
tion
Navigation
You can display the SIRIUS XM service infor- menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
mation. the COMAND controller and press W to
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND confirm.
controller.
X Select Compass and press W to confirm.
X Select SIRIUS Service and press W to
confirm.
The window on the right half of the display
shows the telephone number of the pro-
vider (SIRIUS XM) and the serial number of
your service module.
Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic

report service Example: compass
: Current direction of travel
XCall the traffic report provider's phone ; Current height above average sea level
number shown on the screen. (rounded)
i You can also have the satellite service = Current vehicle position: longitude coor-
activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS dinates
XM Radio website at ? Number of GPS satellites currently being
http://www.sirius.com (USA). used
Once the connection has been established: A Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-
X Follow the instructions of the operator. nates
The activation process may take up to ten B Currently set steering angle of the front
minutes. wheels
If registration is not included when purchas- i To display current elevation ;, the sys-
ing the system, your credit card details will be tem must be able to receive at least four
required to activate your account. satellites. Steering angle B can be a max-
imum of 35° in both directions.
X To exit the display: confirm Back by press-
ing W or press the % back button.
Z
Country-specific information X Select Map Version and press W to con-

firm.
You can call up information on the traffic con- The number of the map data version is
ditions in the country you are currently driving shown. Information about new versions of
in via the COMAND Internet and online func- the digital map can be obtained from an
tion. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The availability of information is country-
dependent. Information can include maxi-
mum speeds, driving with low-beam head- Updating the digital map
lamps or legal alcohol limits, for example.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the Important safety notes
Navigation
Ø button. G WARNING
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
controller. gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
X Select Position in the navigation system these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the COMAND controller and press W to the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
confirm.
X Select Country Information and press Introduction
W to confirm.
When the connection has been made, the The digital maps generated by the map soft-
available country information appears. ware become outdated in the same way as
X To return to navigation: press the % conventional road maps. Optimal route guid-
button. ance can only be provided by the navigation
system in conjunction with the most up-to-
date map software.
Displaying the map data version Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the dig-
ital map updated there with a DVD, or you can
update it yourself.
Carrying out a manual update

i The update process can take a long time
(over an hour), depending on the size of the
digital map. During this time, you will only
be able to switch on radio mode and to
accept incoming calls. The update will be
X To show the map data menu: press W completed more quickly if the vehicle is
the COMAND controller. stationary.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by If you start the update with the engine
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND switched off and the starter battery has
controller and press W to confirm. insufficient power, COMAND may automat-
ically switch off. This protects the battery. If
this occurs, restart the update with the X To confirm the message: press W the
engine running. COMAND controller.
X Insert the DVD (Y page 196). X Take the DVD out of the slot.
COMAND checks whether the digital map The update is complete.
on the DVD is compatible with the naviga- If the update is not successfully completed,
tion system and system software. you will see a message that the map update
A prompt then appears asking if you want is not possible.
to install the database. Versions of the
database currently installed and the data-
base that is to be installed are displayed. COMAND controller.
Navigation
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. X Take the DVD out of the slot.
After selecting Yes
Yes, an activation code
must be entered when installing a database
for the first time. You will receive the acti-
vation code when you buy the navigation
DVD.
If you select No
celed.
X Enter the activation code.
After entering the activation code cor-
rectly, COMAND starts updating the digital
map. Once the update is finished, you will
see a message.
COMAND controller.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.
While the update is running, you will see a
message to this effect and a progress bar.
The navigation system is not operational
until the update is complete.
i You cannot eject the DVD during the
update. If you switch off COMAND during
the update, the update is interrupted. It
then continues from where it was interrup-
ted when the system is restarted.
COMAND may prompt you to change the DVD
during the update.
X Press the 8 load/eject button.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.

X Insert the requested DVD.
Once the update has been successfully
completed, you will see a message to this
effect.
Z
120 Problems with the navigation system
Problems with the navigation system
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

COMAND is unable to Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more
continue route guid- than two hours.
ance after the journey "Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.
has been interrupted. "Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND back on
and driving on.
X Continue route guidance (Y page 92).
Navigation

COMAND is unable to COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the
determine the vehicle's vehicle has been transported.
position. Example:
RAfter transporting the vehicle by ferry
RAfter transporting the vehicle by motorail
RAfter the vehicle has been towed
X Start the vehicle and pull away.

COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the
driving situation, this may take some time.
Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of
the vehicle's position.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with
navigation announcements and route guidance displays.
Problems with the navigation system 121

The Navigation COMAND has an integrated hard drive on which the digital map is
Unavailable message stored.
appears. To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND
deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation
system will then be temporarily unavailable.
X Let the vehicle and COMAND cool down.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.
Navigation
If an area of the hard disk has a malfunction, COMAND can no
longer access the map data in this area. This may occur when
calculating a route, for example.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.
The navigation system will be operational again until it has to
access the faulty area of the hard drive once more. The message
will then reappear.
X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

You see a message The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update.
informing you that the X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller.
DVD containing the dig-
ital map is incompatible X Eject the DVD.
with the system soft- X Have the system database checked at an authorized Mercedes-
ware. Benz Center.

The map software The DVD is dirty.
update has failed. X Clean the DVD.
X Restart the update.
The DVD is scratched.

X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle

interior.
X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.
X Restart the update.
COMAND's integrated hard disk is defective.

XConsult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
122 Problems with the navigation system

COMAND asks for an The digital map is secured with an activation code.
activation code during X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the map update.
Navigation
123
Your COMAND equipment ................ 124

General notes .................................... 124
Telephony via the Bluetooth® inter-
face .................................................... 125
Reception and transmission vol-
ume .................................................... 131
Using the telephone ......................... 132
Using the phone book ...................... 136
Using call lists ................................... 140
Using the speed dial list ................... 142
Text messages .................................. 144
Telephone
Using the address book ................... 146
124 General notes
Your COMAND equipment Introduction

COMAND provides telephony via the Blue-
These operating instructions describe all the
tooth® interface.
standard and optional equipment for your
COMAND system, as available at the time of When connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
going to print. Country-specific differences phones with PBAP (Phone Book Access
are possible. Please note that your Profile), the contacts are automatically down-
COMAND system may not be equipped with loaded to COMAND.
all the features described. With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the
hands-free system and receive vCards via the
Bluetooth® interface.
General notes You can use the text message function
Important safety notes (receiving and reading) if the mobile phone
Telephone
supports the MAP (Message Access Profile)

G WARNING Bluetooth® profile.
If you operate mobile communication equip- You can obtain more detailed information
ment while driving, you will be distracted from about suitable mobile phones and about con-
traffic conditions. You could also lose control necting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones to
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. COMAND on the Internet at
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call
is stationary. the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
center at
If you make a call on your mobile phone while 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for
driving, always use hands-free mode. Only the USA or at 1-800-387-0100 for Canada.
use the mobile phone when road, weather
and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdic-
tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile Call disconnection while the vehicle is
phone while driving a vehicle. in motion
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers A call may be disconnected if:
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) Rthere is insufficient network coverage in
per second. certain areas.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation Ryou move from one transmitter/receiver
may cause damage to your health and the area (cell) into another and no channels are
health of others. free.
There is scientific discussion surrounding the Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible
possible health risks posed by electromag- with the network available.
netic fields. You can reduce this risk by using
an exterior antenna.
Therefore, only use mobile communication Operating options
equipment if it is connected to the exterior You can operate the telephone by:
antenna of the vehicle.
Rusing the COMAND controller:
turn c V d
slide XVY or ZVÆ
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface 125
press W X Enter the number on COMAND

Rusing the 6 or ~ button and using (Y page 132).
the telephone keypad on COMAND X Press 6.
Rusing the 6 or ~ button on the mul- The telephone makes the connection.
tifunction steering wheel X Wait until the emergency call center
Rusing the Voice Control System (see the answers and describe the emergency sit-
separate Voice Control System operating uation.
instructions)
Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and
illustrations in this section refer to COMAND. Telephony via the Bluetooth® inter-
face
Function restrictions Prerequisites
Telephone
The telephone is not ready for use in the fol- For telephony via COMAND's Bluetooth®
lowing situations: interface, a Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phone is required.
RThe telephone automatically tries to log on
to a network. If no network is available, you On COMAND
may not be able to make a "911" emer- X Activate the Bluetooth® function in
gency call. If you attempt to make an out- COMAND (Y page 45).
going call, the No Service message will
On the mobile phone
appear for a short while.
X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the
PIN when prompted to do so (see the
"911" emergency call mobile phone operating instructions).
X Activate Bluetooth® functions and, where
The 911 emergency call is a public service.
Using it without due cause is a criminal necessary, Bluetooth® visibility on the
offense. mobile phone (see the mobile phone oper-
The following requirements must be fulfilled ating instructions).
for a 911 emergency call: The battery of the mobile phone should
Rthe
always be kept sufficiently charged in order to
mobile phone must be switched on.
prevent malfunctions.
Ra network must be available.
In preparation for telephoning via the Blue-
Ra valid and operational SIM card must be
tooth® interface, you should check the fol-
inserted in the mobile phone. lowing items on your mobile phone (see the
Rthe mobile phone is connected to COMAND mobile phone operating instructions):
via Bluetooth®.
RHands-Free Profile
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
The mobile phone must support Hands-
must arrange rescue measures yourself.
Free Profile 1.0 or above.
RBluetooth® visibility
On certain mobile phones, the device itself

must be made "visible" to other devices, as
well as activating the Bluetooth® function
(see the mobile phone operating instruc-
tions).
Z
126 Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
This visibility is for restricted periods of If the mobile phone supports PBAP (Phone
time on some mobile phones. Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
RBluetooth® device name Access Profile), the following contacts and
Every Bluetooth® device has its own Blue- messages are downloaded into COMAND
when connecting:
tooth® device name. This device name is
freely definable, but can be identical for all Rphone book
devices from the same manufacturer. It is Rcall lists
therefore recommended that you change Rtext messages
this name so that you can easily recognize Further information on the conditions for con-
your mobile phone (see the mobile phone necting (Y page 125).
operating instructions).
i Not all mobile phones available on the
Telephone
market are equally suitable. You can obtain

more detailed information about suitable
mobile phones and about connecting Blue-
tooth®-capable mobile phones to
COMAND on the Internet at
http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Cus-
tomer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for
Canada).
i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength)
depend on the supported version of the
Hands-Free Profile.
Connecting a mobile phone

General information
Before using your mobile phone with
COMAND for the first time, you will need to:
Rsearch for it (Y page 127) and then
Rauthorize (register) it (Y page 128).
When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is
connected automatically.
You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones.
Searching for a mobile phone X Select Search for Phone from Vehicle
and press the W button to confirm.
A message appears.
X Select Start Search and press the W
button to confirm.
The Searching for Bluetooth
Phones... message appears. COMAND
looks for Bluetooth® telephones within
range and adds them to the Bluetooth® tel-
ephones list.
If a new phone is found, it appears in the list
with the Ï symbol.
Empty Bluetooth® telephone list The duration of the search depends on the
Telephone
number of Bluetooth® telephones within
range and their characteristics.
Symbols in the Bluetooth® phone list
Sym- Explanation
bol
Ï New mobile phone in range, but
not yet authorized
Y Authorized mobile phone
Conditions for searching # Currently connected mobile
phone
Ñ Mobile phone in range and
authorized
Ñ Mobile phone not in range, but
(gray) already authorized
The Bluetooth® telephone list shows all

mobile phones within range and all previously
authorized mobile phones, whether or not
Bluetooth® telephone list after search is comple- they are in range.
ted
i If the Bluetooth® telephones list is already
X Press the % function button on full, you will be requested to de-authorize a
COMAND. mobile phone (Y page 130). If COMAND
X Select Connect Dev. from the telephone does not find your mobile phone, external
basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning authorization may be necessary
c V d the COMAND controller and press W (Y page 129).
to confirm.
i If you call up the telephone list again, the
unauthorized devices are removed from the
Z
list. In this case, start a new search to i If you want to reauthorize a mobile phone
update the Bluetooth® telephone list. following deauthorization, you can select a
different passkey.
Authorizing (registering) a mobile i Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authori-
phone zation in COMAND and on the mobile
phone (Y page 130). Subsequent authori-
zation may otherwise fail.
X To enter the passkey in COMAND: press
the number keys one after the other.
or
X Select the digits in the digit bar one by one
Telephone

¬ is highlighted after the first number
has been entered.
Passkey entry X In both cases, select ¬ and press W to
confirm.
X To enter the passkey on the mobile
phone: if the Bluetooth® connection is suc-
cessful, you will be requested to enter the
passkey (access code, passcode; see the
mobile phone operating instructions).
X Enter the same passkey in the mobile
phone as the one already entered in
COMAND.
The Connecting Bluetooth Pro‐
Telephone basic menu files... message appears.
Option 1: using the passkey (access code) The Authorization successful mes-
sage appears once authorization is com-
X Select the mobile phone using the Ï
pleted.
symbol in the Bluetooth® telephone list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and The mobile phone is connected to COMAND
press W to confirm. (authorized). You can now make phone calls
The input menu for the passkey appears. using the COMAND hands-free system.
The passkey is any one to sixteen-digit num- i After entering the passkey, you may also
ber combination which you can choose your- need to enter a confirmation in your mobile
self. You must enter the same number com- phone to connect calls. Please check your
bination in COMAND and in the Bluetooth®- mobile phone display. On some mobile
capable mobile phone (see the mobile phone phones, this confirmation can be saved. In
operating instructions). this case, you do not need to enter it again.
If the COMAND display shows the Author‐
i Some mobile phones require a passkey
ization failed message, you may have
with four or more digits.
exceeded the prescribed time period.
Repeat the procedure.
nection to COMAND again once you have

entered the passkey (see the mobile phone
operating instructions). The mobile phone
cannot otherwise be authorized.
X Press the % function button on
COMAND.
X Select Connect Device from the tele-
phone basic menu by sliding V Æ and turn-
ing c V d the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Option 2: use Secure Simple Pairing The Bluetooth® telephone list appears.
X Select Connect via Phone and press W
The mobile phone (or the Bluetooth® audio
to confirm.
Telephone
device) must support the Bluetooth® version The message on the left appears.
2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing.
COMAND creates a six-digit code, which is X Start the Bluetooth® search on the mobile
displayed on both devices that are to be con- phone; see the mobile phone operating
nected. instructions.
X If the code is the same on both devices, X Select COMAND (MB MB Bluetooth)
Bluetooth on the
confirm Yes by pressing W. mobile phone.
If you select Yes
Yes, authorization is continued X Option 1: when requested to do so, enter
and the mobile phone is connected. the passkey first on the mobile phone and
If you select No
No, the process will be can- then in COMAND.
celed. X Option 2: confirm the displayed codes on
X Confirm the message on the mobile phone. the mobile phone and in COMAND (Secure
Simple Pairing).
External authorization With both options, you see the prompt Do
you want <device name> to be
authorized? on the COMAND display.
X If you select Yes
Yes, the mobile phone will be
authorized. The messages Waiting for
a Connection to//<name of B-tooth
dev.>… and Connecting Bluetooth
Profiles... are displayed. If the connec-
tion is successful, you see the telephone
basic menu and the connected mobile
phone is entered.
If you select No
celed.
If COMAND does not detect your mobile
phone, this may be due to particular security
settings on your mobile phone. In this case, Switching between mobile phones
you can test if your mobile phone can find If you have authorized more than one mobile
COMAND. The Bluetooth® device name for phone, you can switch between the individual
COMAND is MB Bluetooth.
Bluetooth phones.
Please note the following: some mobile
phones require that you establish the con-
Z
X Select the mobile phone in the Bluetooth® i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone,
telephone list by turning cVd the you should also delete the device name MB
COMAND controller and press W to con- Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Blue-
firm. tooth® list.
The selected mobile phone is searched for
and connected if it is within Bluetooth®
range and if Bluetooth® is activated. Displaying connection details
Only one mobile phone can be connected X Press the % function button on
at any one time. The currently connected COMAND.
mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in X Select Connect Dev. from the telephone
the Bluetooth® telephones list. basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning
i You can only switch to another authorized
to confirm.
Telephone
mobile phone if you are not currently mak-

ing a call. The Bluetooth® telephone list appears.
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
De-authorizing (de-registering) a mobile Bluetooth® telephones list.
phone X Select the list symbol to the right of the
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de- entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
authorization in COMAND and on the mobile ler and press W to confirm.
phone. Subsequent authorization may other- X Select Details and press W to confirm.
wise fail. The following information concerning the
X Press the % function button on selected mobile phone is shown:
COMAND. RBluetooth® name
X Select Connect Device from the tele- RBluetooth® address

phone basic menu by sliding V Æ and turn- Ravailability status (shown after a new
ing c V d the COMAND controller and search)
press W to confirm. Rauthorization status
The Bluetooth® telephone list appears
X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or
(Y page 127).
slide XVY the COMAND controller.
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
Bluetooth® telephones list.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to deauthorize this device.
X Select Yes or No
No.
If you select Yes
Yes, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth® telephones list.
If you select No
celed.
Reception and transmission volume 131
Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® Bluetooth® phone must have been comple-
interface) ted. The menu item is otherwise grayed out.
Further information on text messages
Basic menu display (Y page 144).
If you have an unread text message, the 1
mail symbol is displayed. The symbol disap-
pears once you have read the text message.
The ú mail symbol is displayed as soon as
the text message memory is full. The symbol
disappears once you delete at least one text
message.
Telephone
Reception and transmission volume
Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface) Once the mobile phone has been authorized,
: Telephone status you can optimize the transmission and recep-
; Signal strength of mobile phone network tion volume settings. Find out more about the
Ä optimum settings for your mobile phone
= Receiver icon ¢ or ¡ online at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
? To display call lists
tance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
A Character bar (1-800-367-6372) (USA) or Customer Rela-
B Bluetooth® name of the currently connections at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).
ted mobile phone
C To display the COMAND phone book
XPress the % function button.
When the connected mobile phone is ready
for use, the telephone basic menu appears.
i Display ; may vary, depending on the
mobile phone connected.
Bars ; show the current signal strength of
the mobile phone network. If all bars are
filled, you have optimum reception.
If no bars are shown, reception is either X Press the % function button.
very poor or there is none at all.
X Select Connect Dev. in the telephone
Receiver icon shows whether a call is
basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning
active/being connected ¡ or not ¢.
to confirm.
Text message display in the telephone
X Select an authorized mobile phone from
basic menu
the list by turning cVd.
The Text Message menu item is only availa- X Select the list symbol to the right of the
ble if the Bluetooth® phone supports the MAP entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile). ler and press W to confirm.
The downloading of text messages from the
Z
132 Using the telephone
X Select Reception Volume or Transmis‐ i You can also accept a call as described
sion Volume and press W to confirm. above when another main function is
X Select a volume setting by turning cVd the switched on in COMAND. Once you have
COMAND controller. accepted the call, the display switches to
X To close the setting scale: press W or the telephone display. After the call is fin-
slide X V Y. ished, you see the display of the previous
main application again.
i Incorrect settings may have an impact on The display does not switch to telephone
the quality of calls. mode if you:
Rpressthe % back button next to the
COMAND controller and then
Using the telephone
Raccept the call using the 6 button on
Incoming call the multifunction steering wheel
Telephone
Accepting a call
Rejecting a call
X To reject: select Reject by turning cVd
confirm.
or
X Press the ~ button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Making a call
Example: incoming call Using the number keypad
X To accept: confirm Accept by pressing W. X Call up the telephone basic menu
or (Y page 131).
X Press the 6 button on COMAND or on X Enter the digits using the number keypad.
the multifunction steering wheel. X To connect the call: press the 6 but-
i You can also accept the call by voice com- ton on COMAND or on the multifunction
mand using the Voice Control System (see steering wheel.
the separate operating instructions).
Once you have accepted the call, you can use Using the telephone basic menu
hands-free mode.
The call volume can be adjusted (Y page 30). X Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 131).
Other functions during a call (Y page 133)
X Select the digits one by one by turning cVd
If the phone number of the caller is transfer-
and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller
red, it appears in the display.
If an entry for the caller exists in the phone
book, you will also see the name.
If the phone number is not transferred or the
"Hide data" function is activated, Unknown
appears in the display.
Using the telephone 133
X To make a call: select ° in the character Option 2:

bar and press W to confirm. X Call up the telephone basic menu
or (Y page 131).
X Press the 6 button on COMAND or on X Select Call Lists by sliding VÆ and turn-
the multifunction steering wheel. ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Redialing A menu appears.
X Select Speed Dial Preset List by turn-
X Call up the telephone basic menu
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
(Y page 131).
W to confirm.
X Select ° in the character bar and press W
The speed dial list appears.
to confirm.
X Select preset and press W to confirm.
or The telephone basic menu displays the
Telephone
X If the telephone basic menu is displayed, selected entry. This initiates dialing.
press the 6 button on COMAND.
In both cases, the calls dialed list appears.
The most recently dialed number is at the Functions available during a call
top.
Overview
X To select a call: turn cVd the COMAND
controller.
X To connect the call: press W the
COMAND controller.
Using the call list or COMAND phone

book
X Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 140).
or
X Call up the COMAND phone book and Telephone operation with a single call
select an entry (Y page 137).
: Person you are calling
X To make a call: press W the COMAND ; Symbol for active telephone connection
controller or the 6 button. = To switch the microphone on/off
(Y page 134)
Making a call via speed dial ? To send DTMF tones (not possible with all
The speed dial list contains stored entries mobile phones) (Y page 134)
from the phone book (Y page 142). A To end a call
Option 1: Available functions:
X Hold down one of the number keys for lon- RAccepting a waiting call (Y page 134)
ger than two seconds. RMaking a second call (Y page 135)
The telephone basic menu displays the RCall waiting (Y page 135)
selected entry. This initiates dialing. Availability depends on the network (only pos-
sible in the GSM network) and on the Blue-
tooth® mobile phone.
Z
134 Using the telephone
Switching the microphone on/off characters in the character bar, pressing W

to confirm each of them.
This function is also available during an active
phone call. or
X Press the corresponding key on the
(Y page 131). COMAND number keypad.
Every character selected will be transmit-
X To switch off: select Mic Off and press W ted immediately.
to confirm. X To send a phone book entry as a DTMF
If the microphone is switched off, the dis- sequence: select Name by turning cVd the
play shows the Q icon, and the The COMAND controller and press W to con-
microphone is off message appears for firm.
a short period. X Select the desired phone book entry and
X To switch on: select Mic on and press W
press W to confirm.
Telephone
to confirm. The entry is sent as a DTMF character

The Q symbol disappears. You will briefly string.
see the The microphone is on message.
X To return to the call display: select Back
Sending DTMF tones
i You can also send DTMF tones using the
Voice Control system; see the separate
operating instructions.
Calls with several participants

Rejecting or accepting a waiting call
The mobile phone network provider must sup-
port and activate the call-waiting function.
Depending on the mobile phone used, the
This function is not supported by all mobile system behavior differs when accepting a
phones. call.
Answering machines or other devices can be If you have a call in progress and receive
controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote another call, a new window appears in the
query functions. display. You also hear a tone. You can accept
X If you would like to listen to the messages
or reject the call.
on your answering machine, for example, X To reject: select Reject and press W to
dial the corresponding number. confirm.
X To transmit individual characters: once or
X Press the ~ button on COMAND or on
a connection has been established to the
answering machine, select the desired the multifunction steering wheel.
X To accept: select Accept and press W to
confirm.
or
X Press the 6 button on COMAND or on
Using the telephone 135
The system behavior after accepting the X Select symbol : by turning cVd the
incoming call depends on your mobile phone. COMAND controller and press W to con-
RThe mobile phone supports the call waiting firm.
function (via Bluetooth®) when: or
The previously active call is held. You can X Press the 6 button on COMAND.
then switch back and forth between both X Enter the phone number:
calls (toggling) (Y page 135). Rmanually (Y page 132)
RThe mobile phone does not support the call
Rusing the phone book (Y page 137)
waiting function (via Bluetooth®) when: Rusing the call lists (Y page 140)
The previously active call is ended. Rusing speed dial (Y page 133)
This is also the case if you accept the wait-
ing call using the Voice Control System (see
Call waiting and conference calls
Telephone
the separate operating instructions).
The COMAND display changes. If you con- You can switch back and forth between two
tinue to operate functions on the mobile calls with the call waiting function. The func-
phone, the COMAND display may differ from tion is available if your mobile phone supports
that of the mobile phone. the toggling function (via Bluetooth®).
You can interconnect various callers to create
Making a second call a conference call with the Conference func-
tion.
If the following requirements are met, you can
make another call while on the phone with You can use the function if you are answering
someone else: a second call or making a second call while
talking to someone else.
RThe function has to be supported by the
mobile phone network.
RThe mobile phone has to support the con-
nection of a further call via Bluetooth®. This
action puts the previous call on hold if the
mobile phone supports this function.
RThe appropriate setting has to be activated
on the mobile phone.
: Active call
; Call on hold
= To interconnect the call on hold and the
active call to create a conference call.
: Symbol for making a second call
Z
136 Using the phone book
To switch between the active call and the call

on hold (call waiting):
X Select call on hold ; and press W to con-
firm.
or
X Press the 6 button on COMAND or on
The previous call on hold is activated.
X To end the active call: select ¢ in the
telephone basic menu and press W to con-
firm. Switching between a new participant and the
or conference call:
Telephone
X Press the ~ button on COMAND or on X Select Conference Call and press W to

the multifunction steering wheel. confirm.
The call on hold is activated. You will change to a conference call. The
new participant is placed on hold.
To interconnect the call on hold and the active
call to create a conference call: Adding a new participant to the conference
call:
X Select Conference and press W to con-
firm. X Select Conference and press W to con-
firm.
Using the phone book

Introduction
The phone book displays the names and
phone numbers of all address book entries
saved in the COMAND address book. If an
address book entry does not have a tele-
phone number, it does not appear in the
phone book.
To call other participants:
The phone book of the mobile phone is auto-
X Select symbol : and press W to confirm. matically downloaded to COMAND after con-
You can now switch between the new par- nection.
ticipant and the conference call or add the
In the telephone book, you can:
participant to the conference call.
Rsave phone numbers (Y page 139)
Rsearch for entries (Y page 137)
Rdelete entries (Y page 138)
Rimport contacts (Y page 152)
Rdelete contacts (Y page 153)
Rreceive vCards (Y page 153)
i The stored phone book and the vCards

remain in COMAND even if you use
Using the phone book 137
COMAND with another mobile phone. The Symbol overview

entries can be viewed without a mobile
phone. For this reason, you should delete Sym- Explanation
any phone book entries before handing bol
over or selling the vehicle.
Æ Address book entry that has been
entered or changed via COMAND
Calling up the phone book Imported contact that has been
saved in the phone or address book
Opening the phone book
\ Address book entry with voice tag
X Press the % function button. These entries have also been
X Select Name in the telephone basic menu by assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are
turning cVd the COMAND controller and available in vehicles with the Voice
Telephone
press W to confirm. Control System (see the separate
If the phone book contains entries, they will operating instructions).
be displayed in alphabetical order. The
character bar at the bottom of the display is Ã Contact that has been imported
active. from a mobile phone that supports
PBAP
The character bar is used for fast selection
of an entry. ¯ Entry that has been imported from
Enter the character using the character bar the memory card or USB device
(Y page 33).
® Entry imported via the Bluetooth®
interface
Searching for a phone book entry

Using the character bar
You determine the first letter of the entry you
are looking for with the first character you
enter.
X Select a character by turning cVd the
i You can also call up the phone book using COMAND controller and press W to con-
the multifunction steering wheel; see the firm.
separate vehicle Operator's Manual. The first entry in the list that starts with the
letter selected is highlighted. If there are
Closing the phone book similar entries, the next different character
is shown. For example, with entries such as
X Select the & symbol in the character bar Christel and Christine
Christine, the beginnings
by sliding ÆV and turning cVd the of the names are similar. In this case, you
COMAND controller and press W to con- will be offered a choice between E and I.
firm.
or
X Press the k button.
Z
138 Using the phone book
X Select the characters of the entry you are

searching for one by one and press W to
confirm.
When the selection is clear, COMAND
switches automatically to the selection list.
X To complete the search: slide VZ the
COMAND controller repeatedly or press
and hold W until the character bar disap-
pears.
The selection list appears.
Information about character entry Phone book entry with several entries
(Y page 33)
X Select a sub-entry by turning cVd and
Telephone
press W to confirm.
Using the number keypad
X To return to the phone book using the
You determine the first letter of the entry you character bar: select & in the list and
are looking for with the first character you press W to confirm.
enter.
or
X Press the appropriate number keys as X Press the k button.
many times as necessary and one after the
other.
Further information on character entry using Displaying details for an entry
the number keypad (direct entry) (Y page 35).
X Select an entry in the selection list by turn-
Directly from the list ing cVd the COMAND controller.
You can switch to the list at any time during entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
character entry. ler and press W to confirm.
X Slide VZ the COMAND controller repeat-
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
edly or press and hold W until the charac- The detailed view appears.
ter bar disappears.
or X To close the detailed display: slide XVY
X Select ¬ and press W to confirm.
repeatedly until the entry is highlighted
again.
X To select an entry: turn cVd the or
COMAND controller until the desired entry X Press the k back button.
is highlighted and press W to confirm.
To select a phone number: the G symbol
indicates that an entry contains more than Deleting an entry from the phone
one phone number. book
X Select a phone book entry with the G If the entry contains only phone numbers, it is
symbol and press W to confirm. deleted from the phone book and address
The sub-entries appear. The G symbol book.
changes to I. If it contains additional data, such as a navi-
gable destination, the entry is deleted in the
Using the phone book 139
phone book. However, the entry is retained in

the address book.
ing cVd the COMAND controller.
A prompt appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
If you select Yes
Yes, the entry is deleted in
Telephone
accordance with the rules described above. X Enter characters (Y page 33)
If you select No
No, the process will be can- X To save an entry: select the ¬ symbol
celed. in the character bar by turning cVd the
firm.
Creating a new entry in the phone The entry is created in the phone book and
book in the address book.
Adding to a phone book entry

You can add telephone numbers to an exist-
ing phone book entry.
ing cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select Add Phone No. and press W to
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeat-
edly in the phone book until the selection confirm.
list appears. X Select a category for the number, e.g. Home
Home,
X Select the list symbol on the right in the
selection list by sliding VY the COMAND X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
controller and press W to confirm. Mobile, and press W to confirm.

Mobile
X Select New Entry and press W to confirm. X Select Continue and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the number, e.g. Home

Home, COMAND stores the data if there are fewer
and press W to confirm. than five numbers assigned to the entry you
are searching for in the selected number
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
category.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
Mobile
If five numbers are stored for the entry in
X Select Continue and press W to confirm.
the selected number category, a prompt
The input menu with data fields appears. will appear. You can then choose whether
to overwrite one of the existing numbers.
Z
140 Using call lists
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. may not be listed on your mobile phone,
If you select Yes
Yes, a selection list will appear depending on the model.
containing the five existing numbers.
i If no mobile phone is connected, then the
If you select No
No, the process will be can- Call Lists menu item is grayed out and
celed. cannot be selected. If you connect a mobile
X Select the number to be overwritten by phone other than the previous one to
turning cVd the COMAND controller and COMAND, the previously available call lists
press W to confirm. and their entries will be deleted automati-
An input menu appears. The data field for cally. They are still available on the mobile
entering the new phone number is high- phone itself.
lighted.
i You will only be able to select the respec-
X Enter characters (Y page 33) tive menu items once calls have been
Telephone
X Store the entry (Y page 34) received or dialed from COMAND.

Displaying missed calls in the COMAND
display is not supported by all mobile
Using call lists phones.
Introduction
While the telephone is being used, COMAND Opening the call list and selecting an
stores individual lists for both incoming and entry
outgoing calls (including missed calls). Call X Press the % function button.
lists are not available unless a mobile phone is
X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic
connected to COMAND.
menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND supports the PBAP Bluetooth® pro- COMAND controller and press W to con-
file. How COMAND processes call lists firm.
depends on the model of the mobile phone A menu appears.
connected:
X Select Calls Received or Calls Dialed
RBluetooth® telephone with PBAP Blue- by turning cVd and press W to confirm.
tooth® profile: The corresponding list appears.
The call lists are downloaded automatically
from the mobile phone by COMAND as i You can also call up the list of dialed calls
soon as the mobile phone is connected to by pressing the 6 button when the tele-
COMAND. phone basic menu is shown. In this case,
RBluetooth® telephone without PBAP Blue-
the list will only show phone numbers.
tooth® profile: X Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
COMAND creates the call lists from both
X To dial a phone number: press W.
incoming and outgoing calls (including
missed calls) as soon as the mobile phone X To close the list: select the & symbol
is connected to COMAND. and press W to confirm.
i For Bluetooth® telephones without the or
PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists in X Press the k back button.
COMAND are not synchronized with those
on your mobile phone. These calls may or
Using call lists 141
Displaying details from a list entry Telephone cate- Display (phone

COMAND can also show a shortened list entry gory book and address
in full. book)
X Select a list entry by turning cVd the Not Classified ;
COMAND controller.
Mobile Ï
entry by sliding VY the controller and Car ´
press W to confirm.
Pager ¨
The detailed view appears.
X To go back to the list: slide XVY repeat-
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
An input menu with data fields is shown.
edly until the list is highlighted.
Telephone
The data field for the telephone number is
filled in automatically.
Storing a phone number
New address book entry
For incoming calls from a person who is not in
the address book, COMAND displays the
phone number in the call list. You can save
this entry.
X Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 140).
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- : Data field with cursor
ler and press W to confirm. ; Telephone number and symbol for the
X Select Save and press W to confirm. phone category (automatically entered)
X Select New Entry and press W to confirm. = Character bar
Home,
Adding information to an address book
entry
Mobile For incoming calls from a person who is not in
the address book, COMAND displays the
Number category Display (phone phone number in the call list. You can save
book and address this entry.
book) X Open a call list and select an entry
Not Classified No symbol (Y page 140).
Home ¸ entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
Work · ler and press W to confirm.
Z
142 Using the speed dial list
i Save is shown in gray if the selected list X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic
entry has already been saved. menu by turning cVd the COMAND con-
X Select Add Phone No. and press W to troller and press W to confirm.
confirm. X Select Delete Call Lists and press W
to confirm.
Home, A prompt appears asking whether you wish
and press W to confirm. to delete all call lists.
Mobile If you select Yes
Yes, the call lists are deleted.
X Select Save
Save. If you select No
The search menu for address book entries celed.
appears.
X Search for the desired entry (Y page 137). i If you delete these call lists from the
Telephone
mobile phone (see the separate mobile

X Press W when you have finished searching. phone operating instructions), COMAND
COMAND stores the data if there are fewer updates the call list display the next time it
than five numbers assigned to the entry you connects.
are searching for in the selected number
category.
You will see a message to this effect. Using the speed dial list
If five numbers are stored for the entry you
are searching for, a prompt will appear ask- Storing an entry
ing whether you wish to overwrite one of You can assign ten speed dial presets (0 – 9)
the existing numbers. to the speed dial list. There are two options
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. available for this purpose.
If you select Yes
Yes, a selection list with the Option 1:
five existing numbers is displayed.
X Search for a phone book entry in the phone
If you select No
No, the process will be can- book (Y page 137).
celed.
X If an entry has several phone numbers,
X Select the number to be overwritten in the
select the desired number by turning cVd
list by turning cVd the COMAND controller the COMAND controller.
COMAND overwrites the selected number
with the new data.
A menu appears.
X Select Speed Dial by turning cVd the
Deleting call lists
If you are using a Bluetooth® phone that does firm.
not support the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the A menu appears.
call lists are generated and managed by
COMAND. You can delete these call lists in
COMAND.
If you download call lists from a Bluetooth®
phone that supports the PBAP Bluetooth®
profile, you cannot delete them from
COMAND.
Using the speed dial list 143

X Select Assign Speed Dial Preset and
press W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears. The selected
phone book entry is listed as the first entry.
The next available speed dial preset is high-
lighted.
Speed dial menu

X Select Assign Speed Dial Preset and
Telephone
press W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears. The selected
phone book entry is listed as the first entry.
The next available speed dial preset is high-
lighted.
X Select the speed dial preset by turning

to confirm.
The phone book entry is saved in the speed
dial preset.
Making a call via speed dial

X Select the speed dial preset by turning The speed dial list contains stored phone
cVd the COMAND controller and press W book entries (Y page 142).
to confirm. Option 1:
The phone book entry is saved in the speed X Hold down one of the number keys for lon-
dial preset. ger than two seconds.
Option 2 The telephone basic menu displays the
selected entry. This initiates dialing.
(Y page 131). Option 2:
X Select Call Lists by sliding VÆ and turn- X Call up the telephone basic menu
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press (Y page 131).
W to confirm. X Select Call Lists by sliding VÆ and turn-
X Select Speed Dial Preset List and ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
press W to confirm. W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears. The speed dial list appears.
Z
144 Text messages
X Select Speed Dial Preset List by turn- played once you delete at least one text mes-
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press sage.
W to confirm.
i COMAND may not load all of the most
The speed dial list appears.
recent text messages:
X Select preset and press W to confirm.
This may occur in exceptional cases, for
The telephone basic menu displays the
example when using certain mobile
selected entry. This initiates dialing.
phones/brackets and if the mobile phone
inbox holds a large number of text mes-
sages.
Deleting a speed dial number
X To delete a speed dial number: select
Delete Speed Dial Preset in the Displaying the text message inbox
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the
Telephone
Calling up the inbox

firm.
The speed dial number is deleted.
X To delete all speed dial numbers: select
Delete All Speed Dial Presets in the
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the
firm.
You will be asked whether you want to con-
tinue.
If you select Yes
Yes, all speed dial presets will Text message inbox
be deleted from the speed dial list. X Press the % function button.
If you select No
No, the process will be can- X Select Txt Msg. in the telephone basic
celed. menu by turning cVd the COMAND con-
The text message inbox appears.
Text messages
Information and requirements Reading a text message
In order to be able to use the text message X Call up the text message (SMS) inbox
function, the mobile phone has to support the (Y page 144)
MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access X Select a text message in the text message
Profile). inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-
If the above conditions are met, new incoming troller and press W to confirm.
text messages appear in the COMAND text The text message appears.
message inbox. The / symbol appears in
the status bar. The symbol disappears once
you have read the text message. The ú
mail symbol is displayed if the text message
memory is full. The symbol is no longer dis-
Text messages 145
X To scroll through the display or select sage by sliding VY the COMAND controller
phone numbers in a text message: turn and press W to confirm.
cVd the COMAND controller. X Select Display Sender and press W to
The display scrolls up or down line by line, confirm.
or skips to the next or previous telephone The view changes.
number and automatically highlights it.
X To return to the telephone basic menu:
X To return to the list: press W and select
press the k button.
Back.
Back
Displaying details and phone numbers
Text message read-aloud function
COMAND can also show a shortened sender
Settings for the read-aloud function: display in full.
RLanguage (Y page 45) X Select a text message in the text message
Telephone
RSpeed (Y page 44) inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-
X Press W while a text message is being dis- troller.
played, select Read Aloud and press W to X Select the list symbol to the right of the text
confirm. message by sliding VY the COMAND con-
COMAND reads out the text message. troller and press W to confirm.
X To cancel the read-aloud function: press X Select Details and press W to confirm.
the 8 button. The detailed view appears.

or X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the
X Press W, select Cancel Read-Aloud COMAND controller.

Function and press W to confirm. X To return to the telephone basic menu:
press the k button.
Sender or text display
You can switch between displaying the text Managing text messages
message sender or the text message content.
The sender display shows the sender of the Calling a text message sender
text message. If the sender is stored in the X Press W the COMAND controller while the
COMAND phone book, the name is displayed.
text message is being displayed.
The text display shows the first few words of
X Select Call Sender and press W to con-
the text message.
firm.
X Select a text message in the text message
The telephone makes the call to the sender.
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-
troller.
X To switch to the text display: select the
list symbol to the right of the text message
by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Display Text and press W to con-
firm.
The view changes.
X To switch to the sender display: select
the list symbol to the right of the text mes-
Z
146 Using the address book
Using phone numbers in the text Adding the sender of a text message to
an address book entry
X Press W the COMAND controller while the
text message is being displayed.
X Select Save Number and press W to con-
firm.
X Select Add Phone No. and press W to
confirm.
X Proceed from the step "Select a number
category" (Y page 139).
: Usable numerical sequence Deleting a text message

Telephone
Numbers in text messages that are highligh- X Select a text message in the text message
ted in red can be used. inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-
X Select a usable number when the text mes- troller.
sage is displayed. X Select the list symbol to the right of the text
X Press W the COMAND controller and message by sliding VY the COMAND con-
select Use
Use. troller and press W to confirm.
X Select Call
Call.
The phone makes the call. A deletion prompt appears.
i It is possible that a highlighted numerical If you select Yes
Yes, the text message is
sequence may not contain a telephone deleted.
number. If you select No
i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no." celed.
functions to save this telephone number or
to add it to an existing entry. i This delete function is not supported by all
mobile phones. The Delete failed mes-
sage appears.
Storing the sender of a text message in
the address book
This function is not available if the sender’s Using the address book
telephone number is already stored in the
Introduction
address book.
X Press W the COMAND controller while the Always pay attention to traffic conditions.
text message is being displayed. Before starting the journey, familiarize your-
X Select Save Number and press W to con- self with the address book functions.
firm. Only use COMAND when the road and traffic
X Select New Entry and press W to confirm. conditions permit. You could otherwise
X Store the phone number (Y page 141)
become involved in an accident in which you
or others could be injured.
The address book organizes and stores
entries that are entered from different sour-
ces (mobile phone, memory card, USB device,
COMAND phone book, navigation system).
Using the address book 147
You can use these entries to make telephone Using the telephone basic menu:
calls and for navigation. X When the telephone basic menu is dis-
i Number of contacts in the address played, select Tel by sliding VZ the
book: the address book can store a total of COMAND controller and press W to con-
4000 contacts. firm.
1500 entries each are reserved in the X Select Address Book from the menu and
address book for: press W to confirm.
Rcontacts from the mobile phone
Rcontacts that you create in COMAND or
import from other sources
The remaining 1,000 entries are assigned
by COMAND as necessary.
Telephone
i Display of mobile phone contacts: con-
tacts downloaded from the mobile phone
remain in the address book even if you dis-
connect the mobile phone from COMAND.
Contacts that have previously been availa-
ble can be displayed as soon as the mobile Address book with address book entry ¥ and nav-
phone is reconnected. COMAND down- igable data L
loads the contacts again so that any new X To browse in the address book: turn
contacts that have been added to the cVd the COMAND controller.
mobile phone can be displayed. X To close the address book: press the
As soon as you connect a new mobile % button.
phone to COMAND all the contacts from
the previous mobile phone are replaced by i An address book entry can contain the
those from the new phone's address book. following information:
Address book entries remain stored when Rname
the mobile phone is disconnected. For this Rfirst name
reason, delete your personal data using the Rcompany
reset function before selling your vehicle, Rtwo addresses
for example (Y page 47).
Rgeo-coordinates
Rup to five telephone numbers
Calling up the address book
Using the function button:
X Press the % function button.
You see either the telephone basic menu or
the address book, depending on which was
last active.
X If the telephone basic menu is displayed,
press the % function button again.
Z
Searching for an address book entry
Input menu with data fields

: Selected data field with cursor
Search menu with character bar
Telephone
; Character bar
: ¥ Address book entry
; L Complete address data from the nav- X Enter characters (Y page 33)
igation system X Store the entry (Y page 34)
= Character bar
? d Phone book entry on the mobile phone
A Entry with voice tag Deleting an address book entry
For more symbols, see the symbol overview X Option 1: select Delete by sliding VÆ and
(Y page 137) turning cVd the COMAND controller and
X Find entry (Y page 137)
press W to confirm.
X Option 2: search for an address book entry
(Y page 137).
Creating a new entry in the address X Select the list symbol to the right of the
book entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
You can enter address data directly into the ler and press W to confirm.
address book. If you store telephone num- X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
bers in the COMAND phone book, these are Irrespective of the option chosen, a prompt
also saved in the address book. If you store a will appear.
navigation destination, COMAND creates an X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
address book entry which includes the com- If you select Yes
Yes, the entry will be deleted.
plete navigable address data.
If you select No
X Call up the address book (Y page 147) celed.
X Select New in the address book by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-
An input menu with data fields appears.
Displaying the detailed view for an Showing the details of an address book
address book entry entry
Selecting an entry X Select the list symbol to the right of the
The display is shown in full.
X To close the detailed display: press the
% back button.
Changing an address book entry
Telephone
X Option 1: search for an address book entry
(Y page 137).
Detailed display of address book X Make a selection in the selection list by
: To return to the previous menu turning cVd the COMAND controller.
; \ Business details X Select the list symbol to the right of the
= List symbol (to call up options) entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
X Search for an address book entry ler and press W to confirm.
(Y page 137) A menu appears.
X Make a selection in the selection list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller.
or
X Call up the address book (Y page 147)
COMAND controller.
Starting route guidance to an address

X Select Edit and press W to confirm.
X Select the address data field by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W X Option 2: call up the detailed view for an
to confirm. address book entry (Y page 149).
The route to the destination address is cal- X Select the list symbol to the right of the
culated and route guidance starts entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
(Y page 69). ler and press W to confirm.
X Select Edit and press W to confirm.
Calling a telephone number Irrespective of the option chosen, the input
menu containing data fields appears.
X Select the phone number data field by turn-
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press Information about character entry
W to confirm. (Y page 33)
This initiates dialing and you can then make
your call (Y page 133).
Z
Changing the category of a telephone Storing the phone number as a speed

number data field dial number
X Display details for an address book entry X Display details for an address book entry
(Y page 149). (Y page 149).
X Select the telephone number data field. X Select the phone number data field by turn-
X Select the list symbol to the right of the ing cVd the COMAND controller.
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- X Select the list symbol to the right of the
ler and press W to confirm. data field by sliding VY the COMAND con-
X Select Change Category and press W to troller and press W to confirm.
confirm. X Select Speed Dial and press W to con-
X Select a number category, e.g. Home
Home. firm.
X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Mobile. You can now store the number in one of the
Telephone
X If desired, select Preferred and press W

ten speed dial presets (Y page 142).
to confirm.
the option on O or off ª. The phone num- Starting route guidance to an entry
ber is displayed as the first number in the Address book entry with navigable data
phone book and can be dialed immediately.
X Select Save and press W to confirm. This function is available as soon as you have
The new category is stored. stored a destination in the destination mem-
ory (Y page 104).
X Search for an address book entry with the
Calling a number stored in an entry L symbol and select it from the list
(Y page 148).
Prerequisites
X Display details for an address book entry
The mobile phone must be connected via the (Y page 149).
Bluetooth® Interface (Y page 126). X Select the address data field by turning
Dialing a number to confirm.
X Display details for an address book entry Route guidance begins.
(Y page 149). or
X Select the phone number data field by turn- X Select the list symbol to the right of the
ing cVd the COMAND controller. entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
X Press W the COMAND controller to con-
firm. X Select Navigate and press W to confirm.
or Route guidance begins.

data field by sliding VY the COMAND con- Address book entry without navigable
troller. data
X Press W the COMAND controller to con- Route guidance can also be started for an
firm. address book entry without the L symbol. If
X Select Call and press W to confirm. the address data or designations do not
The phone makes the call. The display match the digital map, COMAND prompts you
switches to telephone mode. to re-enter the address.
X Enter the destination address (Y page 63) Deleting a voice tag

X Start route guidance. X Search for an address book entry with a
The navigable address is automatically voice tag (Y page 148).
added to the address book entry.
i This will provide you with an address book entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
entry that is suitable for navigation. The ler and press W to confirm.
next time the navigation is started, the X Select Voice Name and press W to con-
address data in the navigation, rather than firm.
the postal address, is used if you have X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
changed address in the address entry A deletion prompt appears.
menu. Therefore, make sure that the des- X Select Yes or No and press the 9 button to
tination address is the desired destination confirm.
when starting navigation from the address
Telephone
If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND deletes the
book. voice tag.
If you select No
Voice tags celed.
Introduction Listening to a voice tag

You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control X Search for an address book entry with a
System (see the separate operating instruc- voice tag (Y page 148).
tions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to X Select the list symbol to the right of the
an address book entry, you can call up this entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
entry with a voice command and dial a phone ler and press W to confirm.
number, for example. You can add one voice
X Select Voice Name and press W to con-
tag per address book entry.
firm.
Adding or changing a voice tag X Select Listen and press W to confirm.
You hear the voice tag.
X Search for an address book entry with or
without a voice tag (¦) (Y page 148).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the Importing phone book entries
ler and press W to confirm. This function allows you to store phone book
entries from the mobile phone in the address
X Select Voice Name and press W to con-
book.
firm.
The following can be used as a source:
X Select Add or Change and press W to con-
firm. Rthe mobile phone
Subsequent operation is voice-controlled. Rthe memory card
The Voice Control System guides you Rthe USB device
through the dialogs. Rthe Bluetooth® Interface
Imported phone book entries are indicated in

the phone book by different symbols
(Y page 137).
Z
X Search for an entry in the phone book on It is not necessary to authorize the device in
the mobile phone d (Y page 137). COMAND to do so.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the Please bear the following in mind:
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- RBluetooth® must be activated in COMAND
and on the Bluetooth® device; see the oper-
X Select Save Entry and press W to con-
ating instructions for the device.
firm.
Rthe Bluetooth® device must be able to send
The Data saved message appears. The
phone book entry is now saved as an vCards via Bluetooth® (see operating
address book entry. instructions for the device).
Rthe Bluetooth® device in the vehicle must
The d symbol is replaced by the ¥ sym-
bol. be switched on.
Telephone
Importing from the memory card or USB

Importing contacts device
Information and requirements Entries imported from the memory card or

from a USB device have the ¯ symbol.
You can import contacts (vCards) from the The following conditions must be fulfilled in
memory card and a USB device into the order to import vCards:
address book, or receive vCards via Blue-
RvCards (vcf files) may be located in the main
tooth®.
directory or in folders. COMAND allows you
i Up to 2500 entries can be imported into to select the relevant folders directly.
the address book. A message notifies you RvCards must have the file extension ".vcf".
when the maximum number is reached.
You then have to delete existing entries in i One vcf file may contain several vCards.
order to import new entries (Y page 148). COMAND supports vCards in versions 2.1
and 3.0.
Depending on the source of the contact data,
different requirements apply: X Select Address Book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
Source Prerequisites select Phone by sliding VÆ and turning
Memory card The SD memory card is cVd the COMAND controller and press W
inserted (Y page 196). It to confirm.
contains importable con- X Select Download Contacts and press W
tact details. to confirm.
USB device The USB device is inserted A menu appears.
into the USB port X Select From The Memory Card or From
(Y page 197). It contains USB Device in the menu by turning cVd
importable contact details. the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Requirements for receiving vCards via X Select Add or Overwrite and press W to
Bluetooth® confirm.
You can receive vCards from devices (e.g. Add imports the entries from the memory
from a PC) that support the sending of vCards card or USB device into the address book.
via Bluetooth®.
Overwrite imports the entries from the The number of vCards received is dis-
memory card or USB device and overwrites played.
all entries in the address book with the X To end reception: press W or the %
¯ symbol. The previous entries are then back button.
no longer available. COMAND then reconnects to the mobile
After the contact data has been imported phone.
successfully, you will see a message to this Received vCards are identified by the ®
effect. The address book or the respective symbol in the address book.
telephone basic menu is displayed.
i You can select Overwrite if the address i If you switch to another main function,
book already contains corresponding e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the
entries. A message notifies you when the reception of vCards will be terminated.
address book is full.
Telephone
Deleting contacts
Receiving vCards via Bluetooth® X Select Address Book in the address book
select Phone by sliding VÆ and turning
to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Delete Contacts and press W to
confirm.
X Select one of the following options:
RInternal Contacts
RContacts From Storage Device
RReceived Business Cards
X Select Address Book in the address book
RDelete All
select Phone by sliding VÆ and turning A prompt corresponding to your selection
cVd the COMAND controller and press W appears.
to confirm. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
A menu appears. If you select Yes
Yes, the contacts are deleted
X Select Download Contacts and press W according to your selection.
to confirm. If you select No
X Select Receive Contacts From Phone in celed.
the menu by turning cVd the COMAND
This interrupts the Bluetooth® connection
between COMAND and your active mobile
phone. COMAND is, however, ready to
receive vCards from another Bluetooth®
device (PC, mobile phone).
X Start the data transfer on the external Blue-
tooth® device (see the operating instruc-
tions for the device).
Z
Switching importing of contacts on/off for example, prevent a passenger from seeing
the name of a caller.
Activating the function has the following
effects:
RThe mobile phone's phone book and
address book data are hidden. They can
therefore not be used to make calls, send
text messages or to navigate.
You still have access to the phone book and
address book stored on COMAND.
RDuring incoming calls, the caller's name is
not displayed if there is an address book
You can choose whether contacts are auto- entry for the number that is calling.
Telephone
matically downloaded when a mobile phone is

RDuring outgoing calls where the number is
connected to COMAND, or whether the auto-
matic download is suppressed. entered manually, the recipient's name is
not displayed, even if there is an address
Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 126) book entry for the entered number.
X Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by RThe call list is hidden.
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND RRedialing is not possible.
RThe received text messages list is hidden.
A menu appears.
There is still a notification for incoming text
X Select Import Contacts from <my
messages. For this to be the case, the con-
phone> and press W to confirm.
nected mobile phone must support the
You can allow O or suppress ª the auto-
MAP profile. However, it is not possible
matic download.
that, for example, the passenger could see
Proceed as follows if you do not want to save the phone number or have access to the
sensitive contacts in the address book: message.
X Connect the mobile phone to COMAND.
Contacts are automatically downloaded to
the address book.
X Delete sensitive contacts in the address
book.
X Switch off the Import Contacts from
<my phone> function ª.
The next time you connect your mobile
phone to COMAND, no more contacts will
be downloaded, not even newly-added con-
tacts.
Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 126)
X Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by
Switching the display of contact details
(privacy) on/off sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
Using the Hide Data setting, you can decide A menu appears.
whether the phone and address book data are
to be visible on the screen. You can therefore,
X To hide details: select Hide Data: <My

Phone> and press W to confirm.
You can allow access to address data ª or
you can prevent access O.
Telephone
Z
156
157

General notes .................................... 158
Setting access data (Canada only) .. 159
Establishing/ending the connec-
tion ..................................................... 166
Google™ local search ....................... 167
Destination/route download ........... 170
Options .............................................. 172
Other services ................................... 174
Internet radio .................................... 175
Internet .............................................. 176

158 General notes
Your COMAND equipment i The availability of individual COMAND

Mercedes-Benz Apps may vary depending
These operating instructions describe all the on the country.
standard and optional equipment for your i The terms of use are shown when
COMAND system, as available at the time of COMAND is used for the first time and then
going to print. Country-specific differences once a year thereafter. Only read and
are possible. Please note that your accept the terms of use when the vehicle is
COMAND system may not be equipped with stationary.
i Internet pages cannot be shown on the
driver's side while the vehicle is in motion.
General notes Canada only:
Conditions for access The COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps and the
Internet access are available via the Blue-
G WARNING tooth® interface.
If you operate information systems and com- In order to use the functions, the following
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- conditions are necessary:
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
RThe mobile phone supports the DUN Blue-
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. tooth® profile (Dial-Up Networking) and is
Only operate the equipment when the traffic connected to COMAND via the Bluetooth®
situation permits. If you are not sure that this interface (Y page 126). The DUN Blue-
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention tooth® profile enables the mobile phone to
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- establish a dial-up connection to the Inter-
ment when the vehicle is stationary. net.
RYou need a valid mobile service contract
You must observe the legal requirements for with a data option, which is used to calcu-
the country in which you are currently driving late the associated connection costs.
when operating COMAND. RThe access data of the mobile phone net-
USA only: work provider must be set on COMAND for
To use COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps and the connected mobile phone (Y page 160).
Internet access, the following conditions i If the connected mobile phone supports
must be fulfilled: the PAN Bluetooth profile (Personal Area
Rmbrace is activated and operational Network), you can use the automatic con-
Rmbrace is activated for COMAND figuration function (Y page 160).
Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access i You can obtain more detailed information
Priority of connections: an emergency call about suitable mobile phones on the Inter-
has the highest priority. When a service call, net at http://www.mercedes-
e.g. a breakdown service call or the MB Info benz.com/connect or from your author-
Call, is active, an emergency call can still be ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
initiated.
i If you use incorrect access data, addi-
A service call, on the other hand, has priority
tional costs may be incurred. This can hap-
over a current Internet connection. Therefore,
pen when you use details that are different
you cannot establish an Internet connection
from the contract or details from another
during a service call.
contract/data package.
Setting access data (Canada only) 159
i The availability of individual Mercedes- i It is possible that you may not be able to
Benz Apps may vary depending on the receive calls when an Internet connection
country. is active. This depends on the mobile phone
and the mobile phone network used.
i The terms of use are shown when
COMAND is used for the first time and then
once a year thereafter. Only read and
Roaming (Canada only)
accept the terms of use when the vehicle is
stationary. When you are driving your vehicle in a differ-
ent country and using COMAND and Internet
i Internet pages cannot be shown on the functions, additional costs may be incurred
driver's side while the vehicle is in motion.
(roaming fees). When you are in a different
country, your SIM card must be enabled for
data roaming. If your mobile phone network
Connection difficulties while the vehi-
provider does not have a data roaming agree-
cle is in motion (Canada only)
ment with the roaming partner, it may not be
The following could be the cause of call dis- possible to establish an Internet connection.

connection: Deactivate this function on your mobile
RinsufficientGSM/UMTS network coverage phone if you want to avoid data roaming when
you are in a different country.
Rthe vehicle has moved into a GSM cell with
no free channels
Rthe SIM card used is not compatible with Setting access data (Canada only)
the network available
Ryou are using a mobile phone with "Twin- Introduction
card" and the mobile phone with the sec- To use online and Internet functions, you
ond SIM card is logged into the network at need Internet access data for the connected
the same time mobile phone. You can obtain this from your
mobile phone network provider.
A selected/manually set mobile phone net-
Function restrictions (Canada only) work provider is only valid for the mobile
You will not be able to use the mobile phone, phone connected when the selection/setting
will no longer be able to use the mobile phone, is made. The mobile phone network provider
or you may have to wait before using it, in the is set automatically upon reconnection.
following situations: i When you are driving your vehicle in a dif-
Rwhen the mobile phone is switched off ferent country and using the online and
Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off in Internet functions on COMAND, you may
COMAND incur additional costs (roaming fees).
Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off on i While initializing the mobile phone for the
the mobile phone while you are using Blue- Internet connection, access data which is
tooth® interface telephony already on the mobile phone may be over-
Rif the mobile phone has not logged on to a written. You should therefore check the
mobile phone network settings on the mobile phone (see the
Rif neither the mobile phone network nor the
mobile phone operating instructions).
mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a i Adjust the access data settings when the
phone and an Internet connection vehicle is stationary. You may otherwise be
Z
160 Setting access data (Canada only)
distracted from the traffic conditions, X Press W the COMAND controller.

cause an accident and injure yourself and The list of mobile phone network providers
others. appears.
In order to set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider you can:
Selecting/setting Internet access
data Rselect the predefined access data of the
mobile phone network provider
Calling up mobile network providers (Y page 161)
X Select the ® icon in the main function bar Rconfigure automatically – this option only
by turning cVd the COMAND controller appears in the list of providers if the con-
and press W to confirm. nected mobile phone supports the Blue-
The carousel view appears. tooth® PAN (Personal Area Network) pro-
file (Y page 160).
Rmanually set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider (Y page 162)
Configuring access data automatically
Requirement: your telephone must be con-

nected to COMAND via Bluetooth® and must
support the Bluetooth® PAN profile.
Option 1 if your telephone is not yet config-
ured for Internet access:
X Select Settings by sliding ÆV and turning X Select the ® icon in the main function bar
cVd the COMAND controller and press W by sliding ZV and turning cV d the
to confirm. COMAND controller and press W to con-
When you connect the mobile phone to firm.
COMAND for the first time (Y page 126), You will see a message informing you that
there is no mobile phone network provider automatic configuration is possible.
preset. Provider: is followed by the words X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
Not Selected.
Selected
If a mobile phone is connected and a mobile Option 2:
phone network provider has been selected, X In the list of mobile phone network provid-
the name of the mobile phone network is ers, select Autom. Configuration
shown after Provider:
Provider:. <Device_name> by turning cVd the

firm (Y page 160).
The configuration data is transferred from
the mobile phone. If the configuration is
successful, a # dot appears in front of
Autom. configuration
<Device_name>.
<Device_name>
Selecting access data of the mobile

phone network provider
i You must set the access data of the
mobile phone network provider who pro-
vides the SIM card and the associated data
package (access settings) for the connec-
ted mobile phone. The access data remains

the same when you are in a different coun-
try (roaming). The access data of another
network is not selected.
There are mobile phone network providers
who offer multiple access data. This
depends on the data package used, for
Searching for providers
example.
X Select Search for Providers in the The mobile phone network only has one
mobile phone network providers list by access setting
press W to confirm (Y page 160). X Select the mobile phone network provider
A list of countries appears. by turning cVd the COMAND controller
XSelect the country of your mobile phone A menu appears.
network provider, e.g. Germany
Germany, and press
W to confirm. X To check preset access data: select Edit
The list of available mobile phone network and confirm with W.
providers appears. The list of access data appears
(Y page 162).
i The access data for the mobile phone net-
work provider is selected once for the X Check the access data.
mobile phone connected and is loaded X If the access data is correct: press the
again each time the mobile phone is con- % reset button or the & symbol and
nected (Y page 160). press W to confirm.
You can now accept the access data of the
mobile phone network provider.
The list of mobile phone network providers
appears; the access data of the provider
has been accepted.
Z
X To edit the access data: proceed as The currently selected access settings (# dot
described for manually entering the access in front of the entry) are used for the connec-
data (Y page 162). ted mobile phone.
When you confirm the edited access data, X To return to the carousel view: press the
the list of mobile phone network providers % back button twice.
appears and displays the selected provider.
or
If, after selecting a mobile phone network X Press W the COMAND controller and then
provider, several access settings are dis- the % back button.
played:
X Select the appropriate access setting by Manually setting the access data of the
turning cVd the COMAND controller and mobile phone network provider
press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X To check access settings: select Edit

The list of access data appears
(Y page 162).
X Check the access data.
X If the access data is correct: press the

% reset button or the & symbol and
press W to confirm.
You can now accept the access data of the List of access data (new provider)
mobile phone network provider. Calling up the list of access data
The list of mobile phone network providers
X Confirm Create New Provider in the list
appears; the access data of the provider of mobile phone network providers by
has been accepted. pressing W the COMAND controller.
The list of access data appears. The stand-
X To edit the access data: proceed as ard name Provider <x> is automatically
described in "Manually setting the access entered into the Provider: field. You can
data of the mobile phone network provider" now make the entries.
(Y page 162).
When you confirm the edited access data, i The access data of the mobile phone net-
the list of mobile phone network providers work provider is set once for the connected
appears and displays the selected provider. mobile phone.
Explanation of the access data Input field Meaning

Input field Meaning DNS Address: The DNS addresses
Provider: Name of the provider to (Domain Name Service)
be displayed in the list of can be negotiated auto-
mobile phone network matically or entered man-
providers. The name can ually. The required infor-
be freely selected. mation can be obtained
from your mobile phone
The standard entry is
network provider.
Provider <x>.
<x>
i Most mobile phone
Tel. Number: Access number for estab- network providers sup-
lishing the connection port the Automatic
i The access number function. If you selected
depends on the mobile the Manual option, you
are usually required to

phone used. For GSM/
UMTS mobile phones, enter a DNS address.
*99***1# is used as a
DNS1: Fields for entering the
standard.
DNS2: DNS server addresses
Access APN network access point manually. The address
Point: (Access Point Name) can be obtained from your
You can obtain this infor- mobile phone network
mation from your mobile provider.
phone network provider.
Entering access data
i Entry is not necessary
for all mobile phone X In the list of access data, confirm the Pro‐
network providers and vider input field by pressing W
mobile phones. (Y page 162).
An input menu appears.
User ID: The user identification
can be obtained from your
mobile phone network
provider.
for all mobile phone
network providers.
Password: The password can be
obtained from your
mobile phone network
provider.
X Enter the provider (Y page 33).
for all mobile phone X To enter the phone number: in the list of
network providers. access data, select the Tel. Number:
input field by sliding ÆV or turning cVd
Z
the COMAND controller and press W to Manual: uses the entries in DNS 1 and DNS
Manual
confirm. 2.
The input menu for the phone number
appears.
Entering the DNS1

Entering the example DNS
Enter the telephone number.
X
X After selecting Manual
Manual, select the DNS1
X To enter the access data: in the list of input field with the COMAND controller and
access data, select the Access Point: press W to confirm.
input field and confirm by pressing W. X Enter 172.28.4.81
172.28.4.81, for example.
X Enter the access data.
X To enter the user ID: in the list of access

data, select the User ID: input field and Internet access data for other mobile
confirm by pressing W. phones
X Enter the user ID. If the access data is already available in the
list of mobile phone network providers, you
X To enter the password: in the list of
can use it for additional mobile phones.
access data, select the Password: input
field and confirm by pressing W. The following prerequisites are required for
this:
X Enter the password.
Rthe additional mobile phone must be con-
nected.
Rthe access data must apply to the mobile
phone contract of the currently connected
mobile phone.
X Select a provider from the list of mobile
phone network providers by turning cVd
confirm (Y page 161).
After you select the provider, the list of
mobile phone network providers is closed.
X To set the DNS address: select Auto‐ The selected provider is entered.
matic or Manual with the COMAND con-
Automatic: the DNS address is set auto-
Automatic
matically.
Managing access data of the mobile Saving access data under a new pro-
phone network provider vider name
Overview X Select a provider from the list of mobile
The access data of the mobile phone network the COMAND controller (Y page 161).
provider can be: X Select the symbol to the right of the entry
Redited by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
Rcopied, then edited and accepted for a new press W to confirm.
provider name X Confirm Copy Provider Entry by press-
Rdeleted ing W.
i Changes that you make to the access The access data is displayed.
data of a mobile phone network provider X Edit the access data. A description of the
apply to all mobile phones that use this entry can be found under "Making entries"
access data. in the "Manually setting the access data of
the mobile phone network provider" sec-

i When the Internet connection is active, tion (Y page 162).
you cannot edit or delete the access data of
the currently set mobile phone network
Deleting the access data of the mobile
provider.
phone network provider
Editing the access data X Select a provider from the list of mobile
X Select a provider from the list of mobile
the COMAND controller (Y page 161).
X Select the symbol to the right of the entry
the COMAND controller (Y page 161).
X Select the symbol to the right of the entry
press W to confirm.
press W to confirm. X Confirm Delete by pressing W.
to delete the access data.
Selecting the length of time for auto-

matic disconnection from the Internet
X Confirm Edit by pressing W.

The access data is displayed.
X Edit the access data. A description of the
entry can be found under "Manually setting
the access data of the mobile phone net-
work provider" (Y page 162).
Z
166 Establishing/ending the connection
If a preset time has elapsed during which nei-

ther the online functions nor the Internet have
been used, COMAND automatically discon-
nects from the Internet.
X Select Settings in the carousel view by
sliding ÆV and turning cVd the COMAND
X Select Disconnect Automatically
After: and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X Select 5 min,
min 15 min or Off and press W
to confirm.
Off switches the function off.
An active Internet connection is identified by
the double arrows on the top right of the dis-
play.
Establishing/ending the connection

Establishing the connection
Preconditions for establishing a connection
X For both options, press W the COMAND
can be found under "General notes" controller.
(Y page 158). The Internet connection is established. An
active Internet connection is identified with
X Option 1: select the ® icon in the main
symbol :. The example shows the menu in
function bar by turning cVd the COMAND the Google™ Local Search (Y page 167)
controller and press W to confirm. function.
The carousel view appears.
X To cancel the connection: while the con-
troller until the Mercedes-Benz Apps nection is being established, confirm Can‐
panel or a favorite is brought to the front, if cel by pressing W.
these have been previously created or
(Y page 181). X Press the ~ button on COMAND or on
X Option 2: enter a web address
(Y page 176).
Ending the connection
US only: you cannot cancel the connection
yourself.
The Internet connection is automatically ter-
minated if the system does not recognize any
user input within a five-minute time period.
i The ~ button is inoperative.
Canada only:
Google™ local search 167
X Press the ~ button on COMAND or on Search

or Entry restriction
X Select the scissors symbol on the bottom It is only possible to enter a search term in the
right of the carousel view and press W to input menu when the vehicle is stationary.
confirm.
Entering a search term
i If the mobile phone Internet connection is
canceled, COMAND tries to reconnect. You
should therefore always close the connec-
tion on COMAND or via the multifunction
steering wheel.
Google™ local search

Calling up the Local Search menu
Input menu
X Confirm Search in the Google Local Search
menu by pressing W.
The input menu appears.
X To enter using the character bar: enter
the search term.
X To enter characters using the number
pad: press the number keys in rapid suc-
X Select the ® icon in the main function bar cession.
by turning c V d the COMAND controller The character appears when the key is
and press W to confirm. pressed. The first available character is
A list with active Mercedes-Benz Apps highlighted.
appears.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to
the front by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu is dis-
played.
X Confirm the Google Local Search entry
by pressing W.
The Google Local Search menu appears.
X To exit the menu: select Back by sliding
Z
168 Google™ local search
X After entering the search term, select ¬ Using search results

A menu appears. Here, you can select
where the destination search should begin.
Selecting the search position
X Select an entry in the list of search results

A menu appears.
X To show the detailed view: confirm

Details by pressing W the COMAND con-
X After a search term has been entered and troller.
confirmed, a menu appears. The address of the selected entry is dis-
COMAND searches for available POIs for played.
the search term entered:
X To use a search result as the destina-
Rnear the current vehicle position
tion: select Navigate to by turning cVd
Ralong the calculated route
If a destination has previously been confirm.
entered, the function is available. You then switch to navigation mode and
Rnear the destination can start route calculation (Y page 69).
If a destination has previously been You then switch to navigation mode and
entered, the function is available. can start route calculation.
Rnear an address i The search result is stored in the
X After selecting Near Destination,
Destination enter "Last destinations" memory at the same
an address and confirm. time (Y page 107). You can take the desti-
The search results are displayed. nation from this memory and save it per-
manently in the destination memory
(Y page 104).
X To call up a destination: select Call with
confirm.
You then switch to the telephone function
and make the call (Y page 132).
You then switch to the telephone function
and make the call.
i If there is no phone number available, the
menu item cannot be selected.
Example: search results
Google™ local search 169
X To import a destination: select Import (the COMAND controller and press W to

with the COMAND controller and press W confirm.
to confirm. A menu displays the available search crite-
You can choose whether you want to save ria.
the POI as a personal POI on the SD mem-
ory card or in the address book.
i If there is no SD memory card in the slot,
the Save As Personal POI menu item
cannot be selected.
X To save as a personal POI: confirm Save

As Personal POI by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
The entry is saved as a personal POI on the
SD memory card. Example: popular searches

i You can use a personal POI in navigation X Select the search criteria and press W to
mode for route calculation (Y page 85). confirm.
If the personal POI is saved on the SD mem- X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the
ory, you can also use it for route calculation search position" section (Y page 168). If
in another vehicle. the vehicle is stationary, the search results
X To save to the address book: select can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel
Save to Address Book by turning cVd Adler".
confirm.
The entry is stored in the address book. Search History
Popular searches
This function offers you the previous search

queries.
X Bring Search History in the Local search
This function allows you to search using pre- menu to the front by turning cVd the
defined search criteria. COMAND controller and press W to con-
X Bring Popular Searches in the Local firm.
Search menu to the front by turning cVd The previous search queries are shown
with the most recent at the top.
Z
170 Destination/route download
X Select Mercedes-Benz as the vehicle

brand.
X Enter the mbrace e-mail address or the
vehicle identification number.
X Enter the vehicle identification number.
X Click "Send".
The destination is sent to the server.
i The availability of the destination/route
download function is country-dependent.
X Select the search criteria and press W to

confirm. Downloading destinations from the
X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the
server
search position" section (Y page 168). If Proceed as follows to use destinations/
the vehicle is stationary, the search results routes that have been sent to the server:
can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel X Select the ® symbol in the main function
Adler". bar by turning cVd the COMAND control-
Destination/route download X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to
Introduction the front by turning cVd the COMAND
You can send destinations and routes from The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu is dis-
Google™ maps to the server and download played.
these via this function. You can use the des-
tinations and routes for route guidance and
save them for further use.
In order to use the download destination/
route function, the mbrace system must be:
Ractivated
Rset up
Rand activated for COMAND and Internet
access services.
For information on the mbrace system, see
the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.
XBring the Dest./Route Download panel to
the front and press W to confirm.
Sending destinations to the server i With Exit
Exit, you quit the destination/route
download.
X Call up the website for Google™ Maps on
the Internet. With Options
Options, you set the options for the
X Enter a destination.
destination/route download (Y page 173).
X Click "More" at the destination.
X Click "Send".
X Click "Send to vehicle".
Destination/route download 171
X Confirm the Dest./Route Download Calling up the destination

panel by pressing W.
X Select Call in the menu by turning cVd
Available routes and destinations are
shown in the list.
confirm.
You can save up to 20 routes and 50 desti- You then switch to the telephone function
nations for your vehicle on the server and dis- and make the call (Y page 132).
play these in the list. If you send further routes
or destinations to the server, the existing Importing a destination/route
entries are deleted from the list.
When importing, you can choose whether you
i The routes/destinations sent from Goo- want to save the destination as a personal POI
gle™ maps to the server are automatically
on an SD memory card or in the address book.
deleted from there after seven days.
You can only save routes as personal POIs to
an SD memory card, but not in the address
book.
Using destinations

X Select Import in the menu with the
Calling up the menu COMAND controller and press W to con-
X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd firm.
the COMAND controller and press W to i If there is no SD memory card in the slot,
confirm. the As Personal POI menu item is grayed
A menu appears. out.
Displaying details X To save as a personal POI: confirm As
X Confirm Details in the menu by pressing Personal POI by pressing W the
W the COMAND controller. COMAND controller.
The route or destination is displayed. The entry is saved as a personal POI on the
SD memory card.
XTo call up a POI: confirm the entry by
i You can use a personal POI in navigation
pressing W.
mode for route calculation (Y page 85).
i You can use the function if:
You can also use a personal POI in another
Ra mobile phone is connected vehicle for route calculation.
(Y page 126) X To save to the address book: select To
Rthe destination address contains a tele- Address Book by turning cVd the
phone number COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
Using as the destination The entry is stored in the address book.
XSelect Navigate to in the menu by turning
to confirm.
You then switch to navigation mode and
can start route calculation (Y page 69).
i A route can only be stored as a personal
POI on an SD memory card or taken directly
for route calculation (Y page 171).
Z
172 Options
Deleting a destination/route from the Selecting options for the local search
server
Setting the search radius
confirm.
A query appears asking whether the desti-
nation or the route should be deleted.
Options
Introduction
You can select options for the following
Mercedes-Benz Apps on COMAND:

RLocal Search (Y page 172)
RDestination download (Y page 173)
You can reset the selected options to the
default settings (Y page 174).
Calling up the options menu

X Select the ® symbol in the main function X Select Local Search in the Options menu
bar by turning c V d the COMAND con- by turning cVd the COMAND controller
troller and press W to confirm. and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears. The menu shows the current settings.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to X Confirm the entry after Search Radius:
the front by turning cVd the COMAND by pressing W.
controller and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the currently selected
X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning search radius.
to confirm.
firm.
The selected setting is accepted.
X To exit the menu: select Back by turning
to confirm.
Options 173
Selecting a service provider Setting options for destination/route

download
Setting the type of import
You can choose between manual and auto-
matic importing.
X Select the entry after Import: by turning
to confirm.
X Select Manual or Automatic and press W
to confirm.
X Select Local Search in the Options menu
The setting is accepted.
and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: select Back by turning
The menu shows the current settings.

X Select the entry after Service Provider: to confirm.
and press W to confirm. Deleting/saving POIs after they have
The # dot indicates the currently selected been imported to the server
service provider. X Select the entry after Import & Delete:
i If the entry is grayed out, you cannot by turning cVd the COMAND controller
select the service provider. and press W to confirm.
The selected service provider is accepted. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
The setting is accepted.
X To exit the menu: select Back by turning
Yes deletes the POIs after importing to the
server.
to confirm.
No does not delete the POIs on the server.
Deleting/saving searches X To exit the menu: select Back by turning
X Select the Delete All Searches entry by to confirm.
press W to confirm. i Routes and destinations are automati-
A prompt appears, asking whether you cally deleted on the server after seven
really wish to delete the search. days.
Conditions of use
You can review the terms of use for the
COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps and Goo-
gle™.
X Select Terms and Conditions in the
options menu by sliding ZVÆ the COMAND
Z
174 Other services
controller and press W to confirm License fees must be paid again for use
(Y page 172). beyond this time period.
X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps or Google The COMAND functions include the
and press W to confirm. Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website as a prede-
The respective start page appears. fined favorite.
X Select Continue to view further content. X Select the ® icon in the main function bar
by turning c V d the COMAND controller
Resetting adjustments The carousel view appears.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Web‐
With the reset function, all Mercedes-Benz site panel to the front by turning cVd the
Apps settings are reset to the factory set- COMAND controller and press W to con-
tings. firm.
X Select the ® symbol in the main function The Mercedes-Benz home page appears.
bar by turning c V d the COMAND con- i You cannot delete the Mercedes-Benz
troller and press W to confirm. Mobile Website panel.

the front by turning cVd the COMAND Further Mercedes-Benz Apps
You can call up additional Mercedes-Benz
X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning
Apps, such as Facebook, or Google™ serv-
cVd the COMAND controller and press W ices, such as Street View or Panoramio, here.
to confirm.
The following examples show how to call up a
X Select Reset and press W to confirm.
Mercedes-Benz App, for example Facebook,
A prompt appears asking whether you and generally how to call up Google™ serv-
really wish to reset. ices.
To call up Facebook:
X Select the ® icon in the main function bar
Other services by turning c V d the COMAND controller
Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website The carousel view appears.
the front by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu is dis-
played.
X Select Facebook by turning cVd the
firm.
The Facebook home page appears.
X To call up Google™ services: this is done
through Google™ Local Search
For individual Mercedes-Benz Apps, it may be (Y page 169).
necessary to pay license fees before using.
Use is then limited to a certain period of time.
Internet radio 175
i Facebook is a social network. This App COMAND controller and press W to con-
allows you to log in from your vehicle and firm.
use Facebook's many functions. The carousel view appears.
Google™ Street View allows you to view X Bring the Internet Radio panel to the
streets in 360-degree panoramas. front by turning cVd the COMAND con-
Google™ Panoramio expands Google Local troller and press W to confirm.
Search to include photos at the selected The Internet radio menu appears.
position.
Searching for stations

Internet radio X Select Search in the Internet radio menu.
General notes A list with search criteria appears.
X Select criterion and press W to confirm.
A good Internet connection is required to
transmit audio data efficiently. To ensure the i For example as a search criterion, you can
best-possible reception, your mobile phone

set an Internet radio station that is located
should be connected to the vehicle's exterior close to your navigation destination.
antenna via the phone bracket (optional).
Bear in mind that a relatively large volume of
data can be transmitted when using the Inter- Connecting to a station
net radio. An average 128 kbit per second X Search for a station (Y page 175).
data transfer rate can transfer 56MB of data
in one hour. X Select ; (play) in the Internet radio
menu and press W to confirm.
The data transfer rate of a station is displayed
The call is placed.
while receiving data.
If the data stream is interrupted, an automatic
attempt is made to re-establish the connec-
Calling up the Internet radio tion.
Manually re-establishing a connection
X Select ; (play) again in the Internet
radio menu and press W to confirm.
Ending data transfer:
X Select É (stop) in the Internet radio
menu and press W to confirm.
or
X Change to another audio source, for exam-
ple Disc
Disc.
X Select the ® icon in the main function bar If you change to a main function that is not an
by sliding ZV and turning cV d the audio source, e.g. navigation, the data con-
nection remains on. You can continue listen-
ing to the set station.
Z
176 Internet
Internet
Display restriction
Internet pages cannot be shown while the
vehicle is in motion.
Calling up a website
Calling up the carousel view
X To enter using the character bar: enter

the web address in the input line. Character
entry (Y page 33).
As soon as the first letter has been entered
in the input line, a list appears below it. The
list shows web addresses which begin with

the letters you have entered and web
addresses which have already been called
up.
The list is empty the first time you call it up.
X Select the ® symbol in the main function
bar by turning c V d the COMAND con-
You can now enter a web address (option 1
(Y page 176)) or select it in the carousel view
(option 2 (Y page 177)).
To select in the carousel view, you must first
create favorites (Y page 181).
Option 1: entering the web address

X To enter characters using the number
You can enter the web address using either pad: press the number keys in rapid suc-
the character bar or the number keypad cession.
(Y page 35). The character appears when the key is
X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176). pressed. The first available letter is high-
X Select www by sliding VÆ and turning cVd lighted. Enter the character using the char-
the COMAND controller and press W to acter bar (Y page 35).
confirm.
Internet 177
X After entering the web address, select the X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176).
¬ symbol by turning cVd or sliding X In the carousel view, bring a favorite to the
XVY the COMAND controller and press W front by turning cVd or sliding XVY the
to confirm. COMAND controller and press W to con-
The website is called up. firm.

X To select a web address in the list: slide The website is called up.
ZV the COMAND controller in the input
menu with character bar.
The list is activated.
X Select the web address by turning cVd or

sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The web address is entered in the input line.
The website is called up. The Establish‐
ing data connection to <provider
name>... message appears.
Option 2: selecting favorites

You must create at least one favorite in the
carousel view for this function (Y page 181).
Z
178 Internet
Navigating the website X Turn cVd the COMAND controller.

A button is highlighted in the example.
Overview
Step Result
Example: entering text
X Turn cVd the Navigates from one

controller. item that can be
selected (e.g. link,
text field or selec-
tion list) to the next
and highlights the
respective element
on the website.
Sliding the control- Moves the pointer
ler: on the page.
X Select an input line by turning cVd the

X Left or right XVY
X Up or down ZVÆ
firm.
X Diagonally aVb The character bar appears.
X Press W the con- Calls up the menu or
troller. opens the selected
item.
X Press the k Calls up the previ-
button. ous page.
X Press the 2 Closes the Internet
button. browser. If several
windows are open,
the current window
is closed.
X Enter the text using the character bar or the
number keypad. Character entry
Example: highlighting an item that can (Y page 33).
be selected X If the text has been entered, select the
¬ symbol by turning cVd the COMAND
The text has now been entered.
Internet 179
Menu functions X To call up the entire menu: when the

short menu is displayed, slide VÆ the
Calling up the menu COMAND controller downwards.
or
X Select a free area on the website by sliding
ZVÆ, XVY or aVb the COMAND control-
Open
Opens the website to the selectable item.
X Call up the menu (Y page 179).
X Confirm Open by pressing W the COMAND
controller.
X To call up the short menu: highlight the
selectable item on the page by turning

Enter URL
to confirm. X Call up the menu (Y page 179).
X Select Enter URL by turning cVd or slid-
ing ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 176).
Calling up the previous website

X Select Previous by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W
to confirm.
Calling up the next website

X Select Next by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ
confirm.
View
You can use this function to:
Rposition a selection window on websites
that are larger than the display
Rselect a window that is already open
Z
180 Internet
X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Call up the menu (Y page 179).
X Select View by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ X Select Open In A New Window by turning
the COMAND controller and press W to cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
confirm. ler and press W to confirm.
or X To select a window: select View and press
X Press the z key on the number keypad. W to confirm.
X Select the website in the carousel view by
i You cannot use the z key if a phone
call is being made. turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND
X To position the selection window: con-
Add To Favorites
firm Fullscreen View of Current Page
by pressing W the COMAND controller. Adds the current website to the favorites. The
A selection window appears on the web- website can then be called up using the car-
site. ousel view. You can save up to 20 favorites in
the carousel view.
X Slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND

controller and position the selection win-
dow on the website. X Select Add To Favorites by turning cVd

or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
The selected section is enlarged. press W to confirm.
The following message appears: The page
X To display and select open windows: has been added to your favorites.
favorites
select Display Open Windows by turning
Display favorites
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
ler and press W to confirm. X Call up the menu (Y page 179).
The carousel view appears. X Select Display Favorites by turning
X Press W the COMAND controller. cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
The website is displayed. ler and press W to confirm.
The favorites are shown in the carousel
view.
Exiting the menu
Further information on favorites
X Call up the menu (Y page 179). (Y page 181).
X Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ
Refreshing a website
confirm. X Call up the menu (Y page 179).
The Internet browser is closed. If other win- X Select Reload by turning cVd or sliding
dows are opened in the background, ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W
another prompt appears. to confirm.
Closing the active window
Other menu functions X Call up the menu (Y page 179).
Opening in a new window X Select Close Active Window by turning
You can open up to five windows simultane- cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
ously. ler and press W to confirm.
or
X Press the 2 button to the right of the
COMAND controller.
Internet 181
i You cannot use the 2 button if a

phone call is being made.
Displaying the complete web address of the
selected link
X Select Link Details by turning cVd or
sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The URL appears.
X Press W the COMAND controller and close
the display. X Enter the web address (URL) and name
using either the character bar or the num-
Settings
ber keypad. Entering characters
The settings are described in a separate sec- (Y page 33)
tion (Y page 183). X Select the¬icon and press W to con-

firm.
The favorite has been created.
Favorites
Adding a favorite via the menu
Introduction
X When a website is displayed, call up the
Favorites are frequently visited websites. menu.
You have the following options for creating a X Select Add To Favorites in the menu and
favorite: press W to confirm (Y page 180).
Rin the carousel view (Y page 181)
Rvia the menu item Add To Favorites Selecting favorites
(Y page 180) X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176).
Before creating a favorite in the carousel
view, you must first close active connections X Select the favorite in the carousel view by
(Y page 166). turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND
You can select and edit favorites that you
The favorite is opened.
have created.
Creating favorites Editing favorites
Creating favorites in the carousel view Editing favorites in the carousel view
X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176). X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176).
X Select Edit by sliding VÆ and turning
X Bring the Create New Favorite panel to cVd the COMAND controller and press W
the front by turning cVd or sliding XVY to confirm.
the COMAND controller. An input menu appears.
X Press W the COMAND controller. X Enter the web address (URL) and name
An input menu appears. using either the character bar or the num-
ber keypad (Y page 33).
Z
182 Internet
Editing favorites in the Favorites menu Exiting

X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 181).
X Select Display Favorites by turning X Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ
cVd the COMAND controller and press W the COMAND controller and press W to
to confirm. confirm.
The favorite is displayed. or
X Press W the COMAND controller. X Press the k back button on the left next
The favorites menu appears. to the COMAND controller.
X Select Edit by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ The Favorites menu closes.
confirm. Deleting favorites
or Deleting favorites in the carousel view
X Press the g button on the number key-
X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176).
pad (this function is not available if you are
X Select Delete by sliding VÆ and turning
using the telephone at the same time).

An input menu appears. cVd the COMAND controller and press W
to confirm.
X Enter the web address (URL) and name A prompt appears.
using either the character bar or the num- X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
ber keypad. Character entry (Y page 33).
The favorite is deleted.
If you select No
Other functions in the favorites menu celed.
Opening current favorites Deleting favorites in the Favorites menu
X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 181). X Select Delete by turning cVd or sliding
X Confirm Open by pressing W the COMAND ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W
controller. to confirm.
Opens the current favorites in a new window. or
Opening in a new window X Press the 2 button to the right of the
COMAND controller.
X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 181).
The favorite is deleted.
X Select Open In A New Window by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
Calling up details
X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 181).
X Select Details by turning cVd or sliding
to confirm.
or
X Press the z button on the number key-
pad (this function is not available if you are
using the telephone at the same time).
Internet 183
Settings You can select a different character set

here, e.g. if the characters of a website
Settings menu appear distorted.
RDelete Private Data
Deletes data which has been saved by the
browser during Internet use.
Changing settings
firm.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
X Select Character Size or Character
X Call up the menu (Y page 179). Code by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the
X Select Settings by turning cVd or sliding COMAND controller and press W to con-

ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W firm.
to confirm. X Select a setting using the COMAND con-
You can activate/deactivate the following troller and press W to confirm.

settings:
i If you change the settings, the websites
RDownload Images Automatically may not be displayed correctly.
It may take some time to download the
contents of websites that contain a large Deleting private data
amount of images. Therefore, it may be
X Select Delete Private Data and press
useful to deactivate this option.
W to confirm.
RBlock Pop-Ups
A menu appears.
Pop-ups are windows (usually with adver-
tisements) which are displayed automati-
cally when you call up a website. You can
block these displays.
RActivate Javascript
Javascript makes it possible to display and
interact with dynamic content on the web-
site.
RAllow Cookies
Some websites save information in small
text files (cookies) in COMAND. You can
determine whether cookies may be stored.
RCharacter Size
You can select the font size which is used
when displaying the website.
RCharacter Code
Z
184 Internet
X Select the setting by turning cVd or sliding

to confirm.
The # dot in front of an entry indicates
which setting is active.
or
X Select Delete All Data On Exit and
press W to confirm.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Option Function
All Deletes all personal
data.
Cache Deletes data in the
cache.
Cookies Deletes cookies that

are created by web-
sites which you have
called up.
URL History Deletes all websites
visited (path).
ODelete
Delete All If this function is
Data On Exit activated O, all pri-
vate data is deleted
when you exit the
Internet browser.
i If you reset COMAND to the factory set-

tings (reset function), these settings are
deleted (Y page 47).
Calling up the carousel view and clos-

ing the Internet browser
X To call up the carousel view: press the
k back button for longer than two sec-
onds.
X To close the Internet browser: press the
k back button again for longer than two
seconds.
185

Radio mode ........................................ 186
Satellite radio .................................... 190
Audio CD and MP3 mode .................. 195
Music search ..................................... 204
MUSIC REGISTER .............................. 207
Bluetooth® audio mode .................... 211
Operation with the Media Inter-
face .................................................... 217
Audio AUX mode ............................... 223
Audio
186 Radio mode
Your COMAND equipment Switching modes via the audio menu

are possible. Please note that your
Radio mode
Audio
Example: audio menu

Important notes
: Current audio operating mode
Portable electronic devices in the vehicle may ; Main function bar
seriously impair radio reception. = Audio menu
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
Switching to radio mode sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
Switching modes using the function If radio mode was the last mode selected, it
button will now be active.
X Press the $ function button. If another audio mode is switched on, you
The radio display appears. You will hear the can now switch to radio mode in the audio
last station played on the last waveband. menu.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND
i Repeatedly pressing this function button
switches through the wavebands in this
The audio menu appears.
order: FM, AM, WB. You then call up satel-
lite radio mode. Pressing the button again
takes you back to FM radio mode.
Example: HD Radio display

: Display window with station settings
; Preset position of the selected station
= Name of the selected station (symbol for
HD Radio™ and number of subprogram)
? Frequency of the selected station
A Sound settings
Radio mode 187
B FM radio, AM radio or WB radio RFM: CD quality sound.

C Program information AM: analog FM station sound quality.
D Preset functions Rthe display of text-based information
E Radio functions (e.g. artist, track name) in the display
X Select FM/AM Radio by turning cVd the For further information on HD Radio™, visit
COMAND controller and press W to con- http://www.hdradio.com.
firm.
Switching wavebands
Switching HD Radio on/off You can switch the radio between the FM, AM
and WB wavebands.
Audio
You can switch off HD Radio™ in the radio
: Waveband submenu
submenu:
X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding XOption 1: press the $ function button
VÆ the COMAND controller and press W until the desired waveband is set.
to confirm. i Repeatedly pressing this function button
X Select HD Radio and press W to confirm. switches through the wavebands in this
HD Radio™ on: O order: FM, AM, WB. You then call up satel-
lite radio mode. Pressing the button again
HD Radio™ off: ª
takes you back to FM radio mode.
i Notes on HD Radio™: X Option 2: select FMFM, AM or WB in the radio
HD Radio™ is a digital radio system from display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
the U.S.A. When HD Radio is off, you will COMAND controller and press W to con-
hear only analog programs on all frequen- firm.
cies. X The waveband submenu is opened.
HD Radio™ provides: X Select a waveband and press W to confirm.
Rdigital transmission on the same wave- You will hear the last station played on the
bands as analog AM/FM. The analog selected waveband. The # dot shows the
AM/FM stations remain in the same currently selected waveband.
position when selecting a station.
Rbroadcasting of several program streams
over a single FM frequency (e.g. HD1,
HD2, etc.).
Rclear, interference free reception.
188 Radio mode
Selecting a station Waveband Frequency

Selects stations via the station search AM (MF) 530 - 1700 kHz
function
FM (VHF) 87.7 - 107.9 MHz
X Press the E or F button.
or WB (Weather Band) Weather report
channels
troller while the display/selection window
in the radio display is active. i You can only enter currently permitted
Station search scans up or down and stops numbers.
at the next station found. i If you enter a frequency in the FM or AM
wavebands which is outside the frequency
Audio
Selecting station via the station presets range, COMAND sets the next lower fre-
quency.
X Quick setting: press a number key, e.g.
l.
X Directly in the station presets: select Storing station
Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
Storing station manually
confirm. There are ten presets available for the FM and
or AM wavebands.
X When the display/selection window is
active, press W the COMAND controller.
The station preset memory appears. The
# dot indicates under which preset the
currently selected station is stored.
X Select a station by turning cVd and press-
ing W to confirm or press a number key,
e.g. l.
Selecting stations by entering the fre-

quency manually Example: station presets
X Option 1: press the l button. X Quick save: press and hold a number key,
e.g. l, until you hear a tone.
X Option 2: select Radio in the radio display
The station is stored.
by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
firm.
X Select Enter Frequency and press W to
confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, an input
menu will appear.
X Enter a frequency using the number keys.
COMAND sets the frequency entered.
Radio mode 189
X Directly in the station presets: press W Weather Band

the COMAND controller when the display/
selection window is active. Activating
or X Press the $ function button repeatedly
X Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning until the Weather Band is switched on.
cVd the COMAND controller and press W or
to confirm. X Select the currently set waveband FM or AM
In both cases, the station presets appear. by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
The # dot indicates under which preset COMAND controller and press W to con-
the currently selected station is stored. firm.
X Select a preset by turning cVd the X Select WB from the menu and press W to
COMAND controller and press and hold W confirm.
Audio
until you hear a tone.
The station is stored under the preset. Searching for a channel
Storing station automatically

X Quick select: turn cVd or slide XVY the
COMAND controller while the display/
This function automatically stores stations selection window is active.
with adequate reception under the presets. or
The search starts at the lowest frequency. X Press the E or F button.
COMAND stores any stations found, begin-
Channel search scans up or down and
ning with preset 1. When the highest fre-
stops at the next channel found.
quency is reached or 10 stations have been
found, the storing process ends. Any stations
stored manually under the presets will be lost. Selecting a channel from the channel
COMAND may not occupy all memory slots list
when storing.
X Option 1: press W the COMAND controller
when the display/selection window is
active.
The channel preset memory appears.
X Option 2: select Presets by sliding VÆ
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
The channel preset memory appears.
X Irrespective of the option, select Autos‐
tore and press W to confirm. X Select Channel by sliding VÆ and turning
In both cases, COMAND searches for sta- cVd the COMAND controller and press W
tions that can be received. You will see a to confirm.
message to this effect. The available sta- The channel list appears.
tions are automatically stored in the preset
positions.
X To cancel storing: select Cancel and
press W to confirm.
190 Satellite radio
X Select a channel by turning cVd the This function is only available for analog FM
COMAND controller and press W to con- programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD
firm. Radio™).
or Information relevant to the current station is
X Press a number key on the control panel, shown in the display window.
e.g. n, at any time. X Select Info in the radio display by sliding
Displaying station information Information on the currently selected sta-
tion is displayed. Content is dependent on
the station.
X To return to the radio display: confirm
Audio
Info by pressing W.
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.
Satellite radio
Important notes
i The SatRadio mode described below
This function is only available for analog FM requires optional satellite radio equipment
programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD and registration with a satellite radio pro-
Radio™). vider.
Information relevant to the current station is
i Note that the categories and channels
shown below the main function bar.
shown in the illustrations depend on the
X Select Show Station Information by program content offered by the provider.
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND The program content may vary. The illus-
controller and press W to confirm. trations and descriptions in these operat-
Depending on the previous status, you ing instructions may therefore differ from
switch Show Station Information on the channels and categories offered by the
O or off ª. provider.
SatRadio mode may be temporarily unavail-
able or interrupted for a variety of reasons.
Displaying program information These reasons include environmental or
topographical conditions as well as other
issues beyond the control of Mercedes-
Benz USA, LLC. This means operation may
not be possible in certain areas.
These include:
Rtunnels
Rparking garages
Rlocations inside or next to buildings
Rlocations in the vicinity of other struc-
tures
Satellite radio 191
i SIRIUS XM Radio offers more than 130 appears in the display, followed by the sat-
radio stations in digital quality, for example ellite radio main menu.
100% commercial-free music, sports, news
and entertainment. i You can also have the satellite service
activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS
SIRIUS XM Radio employs a fleet of high-
XM Radio website at
performance satellites to broadcast around
http://www.sirius.com (USA) or
the clock in the contiguous USA and Can-
http://www.siriuscanada.com (Can-
ada.
ada).
The satellite radio program is available for a
monthly fee. Details are available from the i If registration is not included when pur-
SIRIUS XM Service Center and at chasing the system, your credit card details
http://www.sirius.com (USA) or will be required to activate your account.
Audio
http://www.siriuscanada.com (Can- If the satellite receiver is not installed or is
ada). not installed correctly, the Device
Unavailable message will appear.
Registering SatRadio
Switching on satellite radio mode
Notes
For example, to select a channel or scroll in
the lists, you can also use the =;
9: buttons on the multifunction
steering wheel, see the separate vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Important information on registering the sat-
ellite radio (Y page 191).
Service information screen Option 1

: Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM)
X Press the $ function button.
; SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver
The No Service message appears when
X Switch on SatRadio mode (Y page 191). starting up or if no signal is being received.
The satellite radio main menu appears, Once COMAND receives the signal, the sat-
showing the weather channel. You cannot ellite radio display appears. The station last
select any other stations. selected is played.
X Select Sat in the lower menu bar and press i Repeatedly pressing this function button
W to confirm. switches through the wavebands in this
X Select Service and press W to confirm. order: FM, AM, WB and subsequently
The service information screen appears. switches on the satellite radio. Pressing the
Once the connection has been established: button again takes you back to FM radio
mode.
X Follow the instructions of the service staff.
The activation process may take up to
ten minutes. If the activation is completed
successfully, the No Service message
192 Satellite radio
Option 2
The No Service message appears when

starting up or if no signal is being received.
Audio
Satellite radio main menu

: Satellite radio main display If the satellite receiver is not installed or is not
; Channel name installed correctly, the Device Unavailable
message will appear.
= Preset
? Selected category/channel number
Changing the category
A Channel information (in brief)
B Sound settings Satellite radio channels are sorted into vari-
C Category list ous categories. You can choose between var-
ious categories such as News/Discussions,
D Channel information (in detail)
Sports and Country (if available). The cate-
E Channel preset list gory list is sorted alphabetically.
F Satellite radio menu
X To call up the category list: select Cat.
Channel information A can be viewed in by turning cVd the COMAND controller
detail (Y page 195). and press W to confirm.
X Select Audio in the main function bar by The category list appears.
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND X To select a category: select a category by
controller and press W to confirm. turning cVd the COMAND controller and
If satellite radio mode was the last mode press W to confirm.
selected, it will now be active. The category selected is shown in the dis-
If another audio mode is switched on, you play. You hear the station last selected for
can now switch to satellite radio mode in this category.
the audio menu. The All Channels category is at the top of
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND the category list. This category is sorted by
controller and press W to confirm. channel number and allows you to browse
The audio menu appears. all available channels.
X Select Sat and press W to confirm.
Satellite radio 193
Selecting a channel Entering channel numbers directly

Channel search X Option 1: press the l button.
X Option 2: select Sat in the submenu bar by
troller while the display/selection window
in the SatRadio display is active. turning cVd the COMAND controller and
or press W to confirm.
X Select Enter Channel and press W to
COMAND searches in both directions confirm.
(ascending and descending) and stops at An input menu appears.
the next channel found in the selected cat- Entering the channel
egory. XWith both options, press the corresponding
Audio
number buttons on the control unit in suc-
cession.
COMAND sets the selected channel.
i You can only select currently permitted
digits.
Satellite radio menu

X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning
to confirm.
The satellite radio menu appears.
Selecting a channel from the SatRadio
channel list
You can select the channel from the channel
list (option 1) or via the channel list that
shows the artists and tracks that are currently
being played (option 2).
X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning
to confirm.
Option 1
X Select Channel List and press W to con-
firm.
The channel list appears.
X Select a channel by turning cVd the
firm.
194 Satellite radio
Option 2 X Select a preset by turning cVd the

X Select Channel List with Artist, COMAND controller and press and hold W
Title and press W to confirm. until you hear a tone.
The channel list appears and displays the or
artists and tracks currently being played. X Press and hold a number button, e.g. n,
The channel is stored under the preset.
Storing channels automatically
This function automatically stores channels
with adequate reception in the preset mem-
ory. Channels stored manually in the preset
memory will be overwritten.
Audio
X Option 1: press W the COMAND controller

when the display/selection window is
active.
X Select Autostore in the presets by turning
X Select a channel by turning cVd the
to confirm.
firm.
X Option 2: select Presets in the submenu
Memory functions bar by sliding VÆ and cVd turning the
firm.
X Select Autostore and press W to confirm.
In both cases, COMAND searches for chan-
nels that can be received. You will see a
message to this effect. The available chan-
nels are automatically stored in the preset
positions.
X To cancel storing: select Cancel and
press W to confirm.
Selecting a channel from the preset list
Station presets
There are ten presets available. X To call up the channel preset list: select
Presets in the submenu bar by turning
Storing channels
X Press W the COMAND controller when the to confirm.
display/selection window is active. The channel preset list appears.
or X To set a channel: select a preset by turn-
X Select Presets in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
W to confirm. or
In both cases, the channel presets appear.
The # dot in front of a preset entry indi-
X Press a number key, such as n.
cates that the currently selected channel is
stored under this preset.
Audio CD and MP3 mode 195
Displaying information X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning

to confirm.
X Select Service and press W to confirm.
The provider's details appear.
X To return to the SatRadio main display:
slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Channel list updates

During reception of a new channel list, the
Updating Channels... message is shown.
Audio
X Select Info in the submenu bar by turning The station last selected is switched to mute
cVd the COMAND controller and press W until the update has been completed. SatRa-
to confirm. dio mode is not available during this process.
Information on the currently received pro- Once the update has been completed, the
gram is displayed. SatRadio basic menu appears. The station
If available, you will see: last selected is played.
Rthe full channel name
Rthe artist of the track that is currently being Sound settings
played Information on sound settings (Y page 30).
Rthe track that is currently being played
X To return to the radio display: confirm
Info by pressing W. Audio CD and MP3 mode
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up. Important safety notes
Displaying service information G WARNING

The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Handling discs while driving may distract you
: Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM) or from traffic conditions. You could also lose
Call Service Provider control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
; SIRIUS ID of your satellite receiver accident.
Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-
The provider's customer service center is ary.
available by phone at any time to answer any
general questions or questions on the ver-
sions available.
Z
196 Audio CD and MP3 mode
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph Inserting and ejecting an SD memory
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers card
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
every second. General information
G WARNING COMAND supports SD memory cards
SD memory cards are small parts. They can be (Secure Digital), SDHC memory cards
swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This (Secure Digital High Capacity) and SDXC
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal memory cards (Secure Digital eXtended
injury. Capacity.
Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of i Not all memory cards available on the
children. If an SD memory card is swallowed, market are designed for the temperatures
seek immediate medical attention. which may be reached in the vehicle.
Audio
If the SD memory card is no longer in use,

you should remove it from COMAND. High
Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDs temperatures can damage the card.
Notes Due to the wide range of SD memory cards
available on the market, playback cannot
If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must be guaranteed for all brands of SD memory
face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted. card.
If neither side is printed, the side to be played The readable storage capacity depends on
should face downwards. CDs/DVDs with the memory card used. You can obtain fur-
copy protection may not be able to be played ther information at any authorized
by the system. Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If a medium contains other files in addi-
tion to music files, the loading time before Inserting an SD memory card
the first track starts to play may be longer. X Insert the memory card into the slot on the
control panel until it engages in place. The
Inserting side with the contacts must face down-
X Press the 8 button. wards and point towards the slot.
If there is a disc already inserted, it will be If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see
ejected. a message to this effect.
X Take the disc out of the slot. The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The
X Insert a disc into the slot. first MP3 track is then played. Further
When a suitable data carrier is correctly tracks are loaded in the background; this is
inserted, the drive draws it in and plays it. indicated by an hourglass symbol.
Removing Ejecting an SD memory card
X Press the 8 button. X Press the memory card.

The memory card is ejected.
X Take the disc out of the slot.
X Remove the memory card from slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it
is drawn in again automatically after a short
while and reloaded.
Connecting a USB device By pressing the h button repeatedly, you

can switch modes in the following order:
The USB port is located in the stowage com-
R
partment in the center console.
RCD/video DVD/MP3 CD/MP3 DVD in the
Electrical consumption at this connection
must not exceed a continuous current of single DVD drive (disc mode)
500 mA. If the electrical consumption is RMemory card mode
higher, use a separate source to provide RMUSIC REGISTER
power for the USB device (e.g. RUSB storage device
12 V power supply). RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
X Connect the USB device (e.g. USB stick) to
the USB port.
X Select an audio medium from the media list
Audio
If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see
a message to this effect. (Y page 198).
The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The
first MP3 track is then played. Further Switching modes via the audio menu
tracks are loaded in the background; this is X Select Audio in the main function bar by
indicated by an hourglass symbol. sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
i Due to the wide range of USB devices controller and press W to confirm.
available on the market, playback cannot The last active audio source is now activa-
be guaranteed for all brands of USB device. ted.
Information about suitable USB devices You can activate a different audio source
can be obtained from an authorized using the audio menu.
Mercedes-Benz Center. X Select Audio by sliding Z V and turning
MP3 players must support Media Transfer c V d the COMAND controller and press W
Protocol (MTP). The MTP mode must be to confirm.
active. The audio menu appears.
X Select Disc
Disc, Memory Card
Card, Music Regis‐
ter, USB Storage or Media Interface
ter
Switching to audio CD or MP3 mode
Inserting or connecting a medium This switches to the desired audio source.
X Insert CDs (Y page 196) X Select an audio medium from the media list
(Y page 198).
or
X Insert an SD memory card (Y page 196)
or
X Connect a USB device (Y page 197).
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
starts to play it.
Switching on using the button

X Press the h button one or more times.
Z
Example display: audio CD mode B Artist (if available)

C MP3 mode menu
Pause function
CD and MP3 mode
X To pause playback: briefly press the 8
button.
The , symbol appears at the top left in
the status bar.
X To continue playback: briefly press the
Audio
: CD cover (if available)

8 button again.
; Gracenote® media data found, then the The , symbol disappears.
elapsed track time
= Track number and track name (if stored
on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote® Selecting a CD or MP3 disc
data is available)
? Graphic time and track display Selecting via the media list
A Disc type, disc position in the media list X In CD and MP3 mode: select Media using
and disc name (if stored on the disc as CD the COMAND controller VÆ (slide) and
text or if Gracenote® data is available) cVd (turn) and confirm with W.
B Artist (if stored on the disc as CD text or if The media list appears. The # dot indicates
Gracenote® data is available) the current medium being played.
C CD mode menu
Example display: MP3 mode
Media list
The media list shows the discs currently avail-
able.
: Cover (if available) X Select the data medium by turning cVd
; Track time the COMAND controller and press W to
= Track number and name confirm.
? Graphic time and track display
A Medium type, position of medium in the
media list, current folder or current album
Positions in the media list If the Random Tracks or Random Folder

playback option has been selected, the
Single DVD drive, position 1: readable data track order is random.
media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3
DVDs and video DVDs Selecting a track using the number key-
Memory card, position 2 pad
MUSIC REGISTER, position 3 X Press the ¯ key on the number keypad.

A numerical entry field appears. The num-
USB storage device, position 4 ber of positions offered corresponds to the
number of tracks on the CD. Only numbers
Media Interface, position 5
that correspond to a track number on the
Bluetooth® audio: position 6 CD can be entered.
Audio
X Enter the desired track number using the
i If a disc cannot be read, an entry appears number keys.

next to the corresponding magazine tray. The track plays after the last possible num-
ber is entered.
i If you select a video DVD, the system i Pressing and holding a number key for
switches to video DVD mode (Y page 226). more than 2 seconds completes the entry,
and the corresponding track is played.
Selecting a track using the number key-
pad Selecting a track using music search
X When the display/selection window is
active, press a number key, e.g. n.
The medium at the corresponding position
in the media list is loaded and then played.
Selecting a track
Selecting by skipping to a track
X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the dis-
play/selection window is active. X Select Current Tracklist,
Tracklist Folder or a
or category and press W to confirm.
X Press the E or F button. Select music via categories (e.g. album,
The skip forward function skips to the next artist) with the music search function.
track. If you select a category, COMAND starts a
The skip back function skips to the begin- search for track information if the following
ning of the current track if the track has conditions are fulfilled:
been playing for more than 8 seconds. If the Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected
track has been playing for less than
Rthe track information from these data car-
8 seconds, it skips to the start of the pre-
riers is not yet contained in the COMAND
vious track.
music database.
Z
COMAND imports track information from the controller until the desired position has
following data carriers: been reached.
RDisc (CD/MP3) or
RMemory card X Press and hold the E or F button
RMUSIC REGISTER until the desired position is reached.
RUSB storage device
The Track information is complete
Gracenote® Media Database
message appears once the search is comple-
ted. COMAND stores the music data in its Introduction
own database. You can now select the avail-
able music data within the desired category. This function is only available in audio CD
mode.
Audio
You will find further information on searching

for music in the "Music search" section
(Y page 204).
X In audio CD or MP3 mode, select Search by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and then press W to confirm.
The category list appears.
There is a version of
Gracenote® music recognition technology
on the COMAND hard drive. You will recog-
nize this by the logo which can be seen in the
bottom right-hand corner of certain audio dis-
plays.
Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMAND
uses the information contained therein to dis-
play the artist, album and track name.
If the audio CD does not contain any CD text
Example: current track list information, COMAND can use the Grace-
note® Media Database to identify unknown
X Select the track by turning c V d the
audio tracks when in audio CD mode. This is
only possible if the relevant information is
firm.
The basic display appears and the track is saved in the Gracenote® Media Database and
played. if the "Gracenote Media Database" function is
activated.
If this is the case, COMAND will display the
Fast forwarding/rewinding corresponding data such as artist, album and
track name in the relevant displays and lists.
X While the display/selection window is
active, slide X V Y and hold the COMAND
Selecting Gracenote® data to be dis- X To switch off the display: select None and
played press W to confirm.
In the basic display, Track 1,
1 Track 2 etc.
are shown instead of the Gracenote® data,
for example (Y page 198).
X To switch on the display: select an entry
in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND
Updating Gracenote® music recogni-

tion technology and the Gracenote
Media Database
Audio
X Switch on CD mode (Y page 197). Due to the release of new CDs, the digital data
X Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd on the Gracenote Media Database must be
the COMAND controller and press W to updated. Optimum functionality can only be
confirm. attained with up-to-date Gracenote® music
X Select Gracenote Media Database by recognition technology. Information about
turning cVd the COMAND controller and new versions can be obtained from an author-
press W to confirm. ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A menu appears. You can have your music recognition soft-
The # dot indicates the current selection ware updated there with a DVD, or you can
for the display. update it yourself.
If several entries exist for the CD of a partic- i The Gracenote Media Database is upda-
ular artist, you can select which of the entries ted in conjunction with the navigation sys-
should be shown. tem's digital map (Y page 118).
If the inserted CD does not contain any
Gracenote® data, the Gracenote Media
Displaying the track and album
Database menu item is shown in gray and
cannot be selected. X Press the z button.
X Select an entry by turning cVd the The current track and album are displayed
COMAND controller and press W to con- in a window.
firm.
Switching the Gracenote® data display Displaying metadata (MP3 mode)

on/off COMAND can also display the album name
and artist (metadata) during playback if this
X Switch on CD mode (Y page 197).
information has been entered into the sys-
X Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd tem.
confirm.
X Select Gracenote Media Database by
press W to confirm.
Z
For all media that contain MP3 data (e.g. MP3 The tracks are played in the normal order
CD, SD memory card, MUSIC REGISTER), you (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
can determine whether: In MP3 mode, the track order is determined
Rthe metadata contained in the tags of the by the order in which the tracks are written
encoded music data should be displayed to the MP3 data carrier when it is created.
Rthe file and directory names should be dis- Alphabetical order is the most common.
played during playback Once all the tracks in a folder have been
played, the tracks in the next folder are
X To display the album and artist name:
played.
select MP3 or USB in the basic display by
RRandom Medium
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm. All the tracks on the medium are played in
X Select Display Track Information and
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
Audio
RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only)

press W to confirm.
You will hear the tracks in the current play-
list or currently active folder (including all
Selecting an active partition (USB subfolders) in random order.
mass storage devices only) i The Normal Track Sequence option is
You can select this function for USB mass automatically selected when you change
storage devices when the storage device is the disc you are currently listening to or
partitioned. Up to 5 partitions (primary or log- when you select a different medium. If an
ical, FAT, FAT32 and NTFS) are supported. option is selected, it remains selected after
COMAND is switched on or off.
X Select MP3 in the basic display by sliding
troller and press W to confirm. Notes on MP3 mode
X Select Select Active Partition and
press W to confirm. General notes
Depending on the volume and format of the
MP3 data, the length of time required for
Playback options reading the data may increase.
X To select options: switch on audio CD or
MP3 mode (Y page 197). Permissible data carriers
X Select CD or MP3 mode by sliding VÆ and RCD-R and CD-RW
turning cVd the COMAND controller and RDVD-R and DVD-RW
then pressing W to confirm.
RDVD+R and DVD+RW
The options list appears. The # dot indi-
RSD memory card
cates the option selected.
X Select an option by turning cVd and press RUSB storage device
W to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options Permissible file systems
except Normal Track Sequence,
Sequence you will RISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs
see a corresponding display in the display/
RUDF for video DVDs
selection window.
RFAT16, FAT32 and NTFS for SD memory
The following options are available to you:
card and USB storage media
RNormal Track Sequence
Multisession CDs Permissible formats

For multisession CDs, the content of the first COMAND supports the following formats:
session determines how COMAND will proc- RMPEG1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)
ess the CD. COMAND plays only one session
RMicrosoft Windows Media Audio V8 and V9
and gives priority to the audio CD session.
(WMA) without copy protection
If possible, use COMAND to play only CDs
Microsoft Windows Media Audio V2, V7, V8
that have been written in one session.
and V9 (WMA)
Radditional music files in AAC format with
File structure of a data carrier
the file extensions .aac, .mp4, .m4a
When you create a disc with compressed and .m4b, but not copy-protected iTunes
music files, the tracks can be organized in music files with the extension .m4p.
Audio
folders. A folder may also contain subfolders.
The disc may contain no more than eight i If, in addition to MP3 files, there are other
directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level music files in these audio formats stored on
will not be recognized by the system. the disc, the loading process may require a
longer time before the first track is played.
i COMAND loads up to 15,000 tracks from
an SD memory card or USB storage i The MP3 audio encoding method is under
medium. license from Fraunhofer IIS (Institut Integ-
rierte Schaltungen – Institute for Integrated
Circuits) and Thomson.
Track and file names
When you create a disc with compressed Permissible bit and sampling rates
music files, you can assign names to the
tracks and folders. COMAND supports MP3 files of the following
types:
COMAND uses these names accordingly for
the display. Folders that contain data other Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s
than MP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by to 320 kbit/s
COMAND. Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root COMAND supports WMA files of the follow-
directory itself, the root directory will also be ing types:
treated as a folder. COMAND will then show Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s
the name of the root directory as the folder
Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
name.
You should observe the following when COMAND does not support WMA files of the
assigning track names: following types:
RDRM (Digital Rights Management) encryp-
Rtrack names must have at least one char-
acter. ted files
Rvariable bit rate
Rtrack names must have the extension
"mp3" or "wma". RWMA Pro
Rthere must be a dot between the track R5.1 surround sound

name and the extension. i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least
Example of a correct track name: 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
"Track1.mp3". 44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a notice-
able deterioration in quality. This is espe-
Z
204 Music search
cially the case if you have activated a sur- i COMAND is able to play back audio CDs in
round sound function. multichannel audio format.
Notes on copyright
Music search
MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or play
back are generally subject to copyright pro- Calling up a category list
tection in accordance with the applicable
international and national regulations.
In many countries, reproductions, even for
private use, are not permitted without the
prior consent of the copyright holder.
Make sure that you know about the applicable
Audio
copyright regulations and that you comply

with these.
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your
own compositions and recordings, or if the
copyright holder has granted you permission,
these restrictions do not apply. Category list
X Switch on an audio source and call up the
Notes on CDs/DVDs basic display, e.g. MP3 mode (Y page 197).
X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
! COMAND is designed to play discs that
comply with the EN 60908 standard. There- cVd the COMAND controller and press W
fore, you can only use discs with a maxi- to confirm.
mum thickness of 1.3 mm. The category list appears.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that The categories are displayed according to the
contain data on both sides (DVD on one data available. The categories Current
side and audio data on the other), they can- Tracklist, Folder
Tracklist Folder, Playlists (if available)
not be ejected and can damage the device. and Photos (if available) are already
Only use round discs with a diameter of assigned. The other available categories are
12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of filled by the music search.
8 cm, even with an adapter.
Discs with copy protection are not compati- Selecting a category
ble with the audio CD standard and therefore
may not be able to be played by COMAND. Starting a music search
Playback problems may occur when playing Select music via categories (e.g. album,
copied discs. There is a wide range of data artist) with the music search function.
carriers, disc-writing software and writers
If you select a category, COMAND starts a
available. This variety means that there is no
music search under the following conditions:
guarantee that the system will be able to play
discs that you have copied yourself. Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected.
There may be playback problems if you play Rthe music tracks on these data carriers are
CDs that you have copied yourself with a stor- not yet in the COMAND music database.
age capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs of
this type do not conform to the currently
applicable standards.
Music search 205
COMAND reads music tracks from the fol- Selecting an album

lowing data carriers:
RDisc(CD/MP3)
RMemory card
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
Audio
X Select Albums in the category list by turn-
W to confirm.
The available albums are displayed alpha-
betically. If there is a cover available for an
album, it is displayed in front of the album
X Select a category in the category list by name.
press W to confirm.
Selecting a track
The Reading Data... message appears.
The search may take some time, depending
on the number of tracks available.
The Track information is complete
message appears once the search is comple-
ted. Playback then starts with the previously
active audio source.
X To cancel the music search: confirm
Cancel by pressing W.
Selecting artists
X Select Tracks in the category list
X Select Artists in the category list by turn-
(Y page 204) by turning cVd the COMAND
W to confirm.
The available tracks are displayed.
The available artists are displayed alpha-
betically.
Z
206 Music search
Selecting a year of publication
X Select the desired cover by turning cVd

Audio
X Select Year in the category list

confirm.
(Y page 204) by turning cVd the COMAND
The corresponding album is played.
Selecting via keyword search
The genre list is displayed.
X Select a genre, e.g. pop, and press W to X Select Keyword Search in the category list
confirm. by turning cVd the COMAND controller
The track list is displayed. and press W to confirm.
X Select a track and press W to confirm. An input menu appears.
Playback starts.
Selecting composers
X Select Composers in the category list by
press W to confirm.
The available composers are displayed
alphabetically.
Selecting music genres

X Select Genres in the category list by turn- X To change the character set used in the
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press character bar: highlight Select by sliding
W to confirm. VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-
The available music genres are displayed troller and press W to confirm.
alphabetically. A list of available character sets is shown.
X Select the desired character set and press
Selecting a cover W to confirm.
X Enter characters and confirm the entry.
X Select Select By Cover in the category
Character entry (Y page 33).
list (Y page 204) by turning cVd the
Depending on the entry, the hits are shown
in a list.
firm.
The available covers are displayed in alpha-
betical order of the artists.
MUSIC REGISTER 207
X Select an entry by turning cVd the X Select a track and press W to confirm.
COMAND controller and press W to con- Playback starts and the basic display
Audio
firm. appears.
MUSIC REGISTER
General notes
! Retain the original music files in a secure
location. An error in COMAND might result
in the loss of the music files stored in the
MUSIC REGISTER. Mercedes-Benz is not
liable for any loss of data.
You can store music files in a compressed
X Select an entry, e.g. Artists
Artists, and press W format in the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 208).
to confirm. The memory has a capacity of 10 GB.
The album and cover (if available) are dis-
played.
Switching to the MUSIC REGISTER
MUSIC REGISTER basic display
X Confirm the album with W.

The tracks on the album are displayed.
Example: MUSIC REGISTER
: Cover (if available)
; Track time
= Track number and name
Z
208 MUSIC REGISTER
? Graphic time and track display Switching on with the number buttons
A Position of the medium in the media list X Make sure that neither radio nor disc is
and name of the medium, followed by the activated.
current playback option (no display for X Press the m number key.
Normal Track Sequence)
Sequence The MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.
B Artist
C MUSIC REGISTER menu bar
Importing music files
Switching on using the DISC button
Introduction
X Press the h button repeatedly until the
MUSIC REGISTER is switched on. You can import music files from a CD in the
following file formats:
Audio
By pressing the h button repeatedly, you

can switch modes in the following order: RMP3
RCD/MP3 (disc) RWMA
RMemory card mode RAAC (with file extensions .m4p, .m4a, .m4b
RMUSIC REGISTER and .aac)

RUSB storage device X Switch on CD mode (Y page 197).
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode X With an audio CD inserted, select REC in the

basic CD display by sliding VÆ and turning
If music files are available, playback begins at to confirm.
the point last listened to.
i CD information such as album name, disc
If there are no music files, you will see a mes- name, artist and track is provided by the
sage to this effect. Gracenote Media Database (Y page 200).
X Confirm the message by pressing W and
store the music data (Y page 208). Step 1: selecting tracks to import
Switching modes via the audio menu

If MUSIC REGISTER was the last mode
selected, it is now switched on.
If another audio source is switched on, you
can now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER in
the audio menu.
X Select Audio by sliding Z V and turning : To record all music files (standard)
c V d the COMAND controller and press W ; To copy single tracks O
to confirm. = To confirm your selection
X Select Music Register and press W to
confirm.
MUSIC REGISTER 209
X Select Track by turning cVd the COMAND

X Select Continue by turning cVd the
firm.
If you do not select any tracks, every track on
the CD will be imported.
Step 2: selecting the target folder

X Select Folder by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con- X To cancel importing: during importing,
confirm Cancel by pressing W the
Audio
firm.
COMAND controller.
The Audio CD basic display appears.
Deleting all music files

! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not
use COMAND during this time.
This function deletes all music files from the
MUSIC REGISTER.
X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
: To create a new folder (standard) (Y page 207).
; Existing folders X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
= Currently selected folder turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select a folder by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con- X Select Delete All Music Files and
firm. press W to confirm.
A prompt appears. No is highlighted.
If you do not select a target folder, a new one
will be created. If you select Yes
Yes, all music files are deleted.
You see the Please Wait... message.
Step 3: beginning the import You will then see the Data deleted mes-
sage.
X Select Start by turning cVd the COMAND If you select No
controller and press W to confirm. celed.
Information about the import source and
target as well as the progress is displayed.
The Audio CD basic display automatically
appears after successful import.
Z
210 MUSIC REGISTER
Calling up memory space info

(Y page 207).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
press W to confirm.
X Select Memory Info and press W to con-
firm.
The following is displayed:
Rstorage capacity
Ravailable memory
The name of the current folder is at the top
and the track currently playing is indicated by
Audio
Roccupied memory
a # dot.
Rcontent (folders, tracks)
X To switch to the next folder up: press the
% back button or slide XV the
COMAND controller.
Music search
Introduction Changing the folder/track name
The music search finds tracks via all available X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
media. The search begins with the audio (Y page 207).
source that is currently active. X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
The following media are included for the turning cVd the COMAND controller and
music search: press W to confirm.
RDisc (CD/MP3) X Select Rename / Delete Files and press
RMemory card W to confirm.

X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.
RMUSIC REGISTER
X Select Options by sliding VY and press W
RUSB storage device
to confirm.
X Select Change and press W to confirm.
(Y page 207).
X Enter a name for the folder/track
X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W (Y page 33).
to confirm. X To save the changes: select ¬ and
The category list appears. press W to confirm.
X Select a track in a category (Y page 204).
Deleting folders/tracks
Example: opening a folder X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
X Select Folder in the category list by turn- (Y page 207).
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
W to confirm. turning cVd the COMAND controller and
You see the content of the current folder. press W to confirm.
X Select Rename / Delete Files and press
W to confirm.
X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.
Bluetooth® audio mode 211
X Select Options by sliding VY and press W Bluetooth® audio mode

to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm. Preconditions for the Bluetooth®
A prompt appears. No is highlighted. audio device
If you select Yes
Yes, the folders/tracks are Bluetooth® audio mode requires a Blue-
deleted. You see the Please Wait... tooth®-capable audio device. Observe the
message. You will then see the Data information in the Bluetooth® audio device's
deleted message. operating instructions.
If you select No
No, the process will be can- Before using Bluetooth® audio mode, you
celed.
should check your Bluetooth® audio device
for the following:
Audio
Playback options RBluetooth® audio profile
The following options are available: The Bluetooth® audio device must support
the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio
RNormal Track Sequence profiles.
The tracks are played in the normal order RBluetooth® visibility
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Certain Bluetooth® audio devices do not
RRandom Medium
just require activation of the Bluetooth®
All the tracks on the medium are played in function. In addition, your device must be
random order. made "visible" to other devices.
RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only)
RBluetooth® device name
The tracks in the currently active folder or
This device name is predetermined but can
the current track list are played in a random
usually be changed. To make a clear selec-
order.
tion of the Bluetooth® device possible,
X To select options: switch to the MUSIC
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you cus-
REGISTER (Y page 207). tomize the device name.
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
press W to confirm. Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio
The options list appears. The # dot indi- data transmission
cates the option selected. AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
X Select an option and press W to confirm. Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio
The option is switched on. For all options data playback.
except Normal Track Sequence,
Sequence you will
i Not all Bluetooth® audio devices available
see a corresponding display in the display/
on the market are equally suitable. To
selection window.
obtain more information about suitable
i The Normal Track Sequence option is Bluetooth® audio devices and about con-
automatically selected when you change necting Bluetooth® audio devices to
the disc you are currently listening to or COMAND, visit
when you select a different medium. If an http://www.mbusa-mobile.com (USA).
option is selected, it remains selected after Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
COMAND is switched on or off. tance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (USA) or Customer Rela-
tions at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).
Z
212 Bluetooth® audio mode
X Activate Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibil- Searching for and authorizing a Blue-
ity on the Bluetooth® audio device. tooth® audio device
Preconditions in COMAND
X Activate the Bluetooth® function in
COMAND (Y page 45).
Connecting Bluetooth® audio devices

General information
Audio
Before using your Bluetooth® audio device Example: Bluetooth® device list
with COMAND for the first time, you will need : Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-
to authorize it. tooth® audio function in range
When you authorize a new Bluetooth® audio ; Bluetooth® audio player not within range
device, it is connected automatically. Con- but previously authorized (symbol
nection involves first searching for a Blue- appears in gray)
tooth® audio device and then authorizing it.
You can authorize up to fifteen Bluetooth®
devices.
i If you authorize a mobile phone that sup-
ports Bluetooth® audio, the A2DP and
AVRCP Bluetooth® audio profiles are con-
nected automatically.
The mobile phone is then entered:
Rin the Bluetooth® telephone list
(Y page 128)
Rin the Bluetooth® device list The Bluetooth® device list displays all author-
(Y page 212). ized devices, whether they are within range or
not. After a device search, devices which are
Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a
within range but not authorized are also dis-
mobile phone in Bluetooth® telephony played.
(Y page 128).
X Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode
(Y page 215).
If you see the No Bluetooth Audio
Device Authorized message, you will
need to authorize the Bluetooth® audio
device first.
X Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning
to confirm.
X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List External authorization

by pressing W the COMAND controller.
X To search: confirm Search for BT
Audio Devices by pressing the COMAND
controller W.
COMAND searches for Bluetooth® audio
devices within range and adds them to the
Bluetooth® device list. If Bluetooth® audio
devices support the Bluetooth® audio pro-
files (A2DP, AVRCP), the devices are detec-
ted.
The duration of the search depends on the
Audio
number of Bluetooth® audio devices within If COMAND does not find your Bluetooth®
range and their characteristics. audio device, this may be due to particular
security settings on your Bluetooth® audio
X To authorize: select a Bluetooth® audio device. In this case, check whether your Blue-
device that has not yet been authorized tooth® audio device can locate COMAND. The
from the list (: in the example) by turning
Bluetooth® device name of COMAND is MB
cVd the COMAND controller.
Bluetooth.
Bluetooth
X Select the symbol to the right of the Blue-
tooth® audio device by sliding V Y the
X Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode
COMAND controller and press W to con- (Y page 215).
firm. X Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning
X Select Authorize and press W to confirm.

to confirm.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device
X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List
used, you now have two options for con-
tinuing with authorization. by pressing W the COMAND controller.
X Option 1: enter the passkey (Y page 128). X To search: confirm Connect via BT
After successful authorization, the Blue- Audio Device by pressing the COMAND
tooth® audio device is connected and controller W.
starts playing. The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth® audio devices within
X Option 2 (Secure Simple Pairing): if the
range and their characteristics.
digit codes displayed in COMAND and on
X To authorize: start the authorization on
the Bluetooth® audio device are the same,
confirm Yes by pressing W. the Bluetooth® audio device, see the oper-
If you select Yes
Yes, authorization continues ating instructions of the Bluetooth® audio
and the Bluetooth® audio device is connec- device.
ted. Playback starts. After successful authorization, the Blue-
If you select No
No, authorization will be can- tooth® audio device is connected and
celed. starts playing.
i The Bluetooth® audio device must sup- i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
port Bluetooth® version 2.1 for connection playback must first be started on the device
via Secure Simple Pairing. COMAND cre- itself so that COMAND can play the audio
ates a six-digit code, which is displayed on files.
both devices that are to be connected
Z
Reconnecting a Bluetooth® audio device itself so that COMAND can play the
device audio files.
The Bluetooth® audio profiles are connected
Bluetooth® audio device and simultane-
automatically under the following circum-
ous search for mobile phones
stances:
Rone of the last two mobile phones to have During the search for mobile phones, the con-
been connected has also been used as a nection with the Bluetooth® audio device is
Bluetooth® audio player (if this function is terminated (Y page 127). In the Bluetooth®
supported by the mobile phone). audio basic display, you will see the No Blue‐
Rthe mobile phone takes over the automatic
tooth Audio Device Connected message
and the Connect Last Device menu item
connection itself.
cannot be selected.
Audio
A Bluetooth® audio player without telephone

functions is not automatically reconnected, Displaying details
even if it was the last device connected.
If the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con‐ X Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the
nected message appears, you have two Bluetooth® device list.
options to connect a Bluetooth® audio X Select the symbol to the right of the Blue-
device: tooth® audio device by sliding V Y the
Connecting last device COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
X Confirm Connect Last Device in the
basic display by pressing W the COMAND
controller. The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth®
RBluetooth® name
audio device, it will be connected and start
playing. RBluetooth® address
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices, Ravailability status (shown after an

playback must first be started on the device update)
itself so that COMAND can play the audio Rauthorization status
files. X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or
Connecting a device from a list slide XVY the COMAND controller.
X Select BT Audio by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con- De-authorizing (deregistering) a Blue-
firm. tooth® audio device
X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List
X Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the
by pressing W the COMAND controller.
Bluetooth® device list.
X Select a Bluetooth® audio device by turning
X Select the symbol to the right of the Blue-
to confirm. tooth® audio device by sliding V Y the
If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth®
firm.
audio device, it will be connected and start
playing.
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
playback must be initially started on the
X Select Delete and press W to confirm. is available, then the artist, track and album
A prompt appears asking whether you name can be displayed.
really wish to deauthorize this device.
X Select Yes or No
No. Using the Bluetooth® audio basic dis-
If you select Yes
Yes, the device will be deleted play
from the Bluetooth® device list. X Connect Bluetooth® audio devices
If you select No
No, the process will be can- (Y page 212)
celed.
or
i Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth® X Reconnect the Bluetooth® audio device
audio device, you should also delete the
(Y page 214).
device name MB Bluetooth from your
COMAND activates the Bluetooth® audio
Bluetooth® audio device's Bluetooth® list.
Audio
device. The basic display appears and the
See the Bluetooth® audio device's operat- device starts playing.
ing instructions.
Using the DISC button
Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode X Press the h button one or more times.
The Bluetooth® audio basic display By pressing the h button repeatedly, you
can switch modes in the following order:
RCD/MP3 (disc)
RMemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
Using the media list

X Select Bluetooth Audio in the media list
Example: Bluetooth® audio basic display by turning cVd the COMAND controller
: Track name and press W to confirm (Y page 198).
; Current playback settings (no symbol for COMAND activates the connected device.
"Normal track sequence") You will see a message to this effect. The
= Album name basic display then appears.
? Sound settings
A Media list
Starting/stopping playback
B Artist
C To stop É or start Ì playback X To start playback: select Ì by sliding
D To connect a Bluetooth® audio device, to VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-
increase the volume on COMAND troller and press W to confirm.
E Bluetooth® audio data medium type
Playback starts. É is selected.
F Data medium position in the media list
i If the Bluetooth® audio device connected

supports metadata and corresponding data
Z
X To stop playback: select É by turning

to confirm.
A message appears. Ì is selected.
X To continue playback: select Ì by
press W to confirm.
A message appears. É is selected.
Restarting playback after stopping X To start playback: select Ì by turning

Audio
to confirm.
Playback resumes from the beginning.
Selecting a track
The function is not supported by all Blue-
tooth® audio devices.
X To skip forward or back to a track: press
the E or F button on COMAND.
During the search for mobile phones , the or
connection with the Bluetooth® audio device X Press the 9 or : button briefly on
is terminated (Y page 127). In the Bluetooth® the multifunction steering wheel.
audio basic display (Y page 215), you will see X Rapid scroll: press and hold the 9
the No Bluetooth Audio Device Connec‐ or : button on the multifunction steer-
ted message and the Connect Last Device ing wheel until the desired track is reached.
menu item cannot be selected. If you press and hold the 9 or :
When the search is finished, the Bluetooth® button, the rapid scrolling speed is
audio device can be reconnected. increased.
X Confirm Connect Last Device by press-
ing W.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device Selecting playback options
used, playback starts immediately or you If the Bluetooth® audio device supports the
must start playback manually. corresponding function, the following options
In this case, you will see the Bluetooth are available:
Audio Device Paused message.
RNormal Track Sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Audio data playback is determined by the
order in which the tracks are written to the
data carrier. Alphabetical order is the most
common. Once all the tracks in a folder
Operation with the Media Interface 217
have been played, the tracks in the next Operation with the Media Interface
folder are played.
RRandom Tracks
Connection options
All the tracks on the medium are played in Overview
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
You will find the connection sockets in the
X Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning
center console stowage compartment.
Device-specific adapter cables are required
to confirm.
to connect external devices to the Media
The # dot indicates the option selected.
Interface. Country-specific versions are sup-
X Select the option by turning cVd the
plied with the Media Interface (Y page 218).
You can connect the following data carriers to
firm.
Audio
COMAND via the Media Interface:
If you select Random Tracks
Tracks, you will see a
corresponding symbol in the display/ RiPod®
selection window. RiPhone®
Rcertain MP3 players
Increasing the volume on COMAND i Store individual parts in a safe place.
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz connec-
tion cables.
i iPod® and iPhone® are registered trade-
marks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California,
USA.
i MP3 players that support MTP (Media
Transfer Protocol) can be used.
This allows the MP3 player to be easily con-
nected to the Media Interface and removed
after use. Audio data is played without
X Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning problem.
cVd the COMAND controller and press W On some MP3 players, you have to activate
to confirm. the relevant function; see the MP3 player
X Select Volume and press W to confirm. operating instructions.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting. Supported devices
X Select Standard or Boost and press W to For details and a list of supported devices,
confirm. visit http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or
Information about sound settings call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
(Y page 30) Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
You will find further information in the "Audio (1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer
AUX mode" section (Y page 223) Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
Z
218 Operation with the Media Interface
Connecting an external device Applications (Apps) that are activated on

the connected device may lead to malfunc-
Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. tions.
They may malfunction in extreme tempera-
tures; see the operating instructions for the i Connecting a fully discharged iPod® or
respective device. Examples of extreme tem- MP3 player can result in an extended initi-
peratures are direct sunlight or very low out- alization period.
side temperatures. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Malfunction messages appear while the
accepts no liability for damage to external device is being activated if:
devices.
Rthe connected device is not supported
i Never connect more than one device at a (External
External Device Unavailable mes-
time. You will otherwise not be able to play sage).
Audio
back from the external device. Rthe connected device consumes too much
USB hubs (devices with several USB con- power.
nections) are not supported. Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty.
Ra mass storage device (e.g. a USB memory
stick or USB hard drive) is connected to the
Media Interface.
In this case the Please connect the
device to the other USB port mes-
sage appears.
i The separate USB connection ensures
quick access and expanded media content
options.
: Four-pin socket for ⅛ inch stereo jack,

i Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center if you have further questions.
e.g. for MP3 players (audio and video)
; iPod® plug for connecting an iPod® Disconnecting an iPod®
= USB socket for connecting an MP3 player X Press the release catch on iPod® plug ;
? Example of device: iPod® and pull the iPod® cable from the iPod®,
X Connect the external device with suitable see the separate cable kit instructions.
socket :, ; or =.
COMAND activates the device, a display
appears (when connecting an iPod® plug or Switching to Media Interface mode
USB socket). General notes
If you remove a device, the No Device Con‐
In extreme cases, starting up individual func-
nected message appears.
tions can take up to several minutes – this
i A connected iPod® or MP3 player should depends on the external device and its con-
not be simultaneously operated via the tent (e.g. video podcasts).
Media Interface and the remote control Only use the original software to save files on
(e.g. Bluetooth® remote control) or directly iPods® or MP3 players. Otherwise, some or all
via the device itself. This may cause unfore- functions may not be available.
seen technical difficulties.
Switching on automatically ? Track name

X Connect an external device (Y page 218). A Graphic time display
COMAND activates the device (if connec- B Track position in playlist
ted via the iPod® connector or USB socket). C Album name (if available)
The basic display then appears. D Artist (if available)
E Music search
Switching on using the DISC button F Position in the media list
The external device is connected to the Media G Type of data medium
Interface. H Playback options
X Press the h button one or more times. X In the media list, turn cVd the COMAND
By pressing the DISC button repeatedly, you controller to select the entry under position
Audio
can switch modes in the following order: 5 and press W to confirm (Y page 198).
COMAND activates the connected device.
RCD/MP3 (disc) You will see a message to this effect. The
RMemory card mode basic display then appears.
RMUSIC REGISTER If no device is connected, you will see the
RUSB storage device Media Interface entry instead of a
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode device name.
RBluetooth® audio mode The type of device connected is indicated by
the corresponding symbol for iPod®
Switching on using a number key (iPhone®) or MP3 player.
The current playback option is shown with a
X Press the o number key (single DVD
symbol after the album name (no display for
drive).
Normal Track Sequence)
Sequence (Y page 222).
This selects the connected external audio
device directly. i If the device connected does not contain
any playable tracks, a message appears to
Switching on via the media list this effect.
Selecting music files

Note
COMAND displays the data stored on the
iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player according to
the file structure used in the respective
medium.
Media Interface mode (iPod® mode)

: Cover (if available) or representation of
device
; Track number
= Elapsed track time (also in format
00:00:00 for audio books)
Z
Selecting by skipping to a track i On an iPod® or iPhone®, fast rewind only

functions within the current track.
X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the dis-
play/selection window is active.
Selecting a category/playlist/folder
or
X Press the E or F button. Overview
The skip forward function skips to the next For an iPod®, iPhone® or certain MP3 players,
track. The skip back function skips to the you can select tracks using categories or fold-
beginning of the current track if the track ers.
has been playing for more than eight sec-
onds. If the track has been playing for less Depending on the device connected, the fol-
than eight seconds, it skips to the start of lowing categories may be available, for exam-
Audio
the previous track. If you have selected a ple:

playback option other than Normal Track RCurrent Tracklist
Sequence, the track sequence is random.
Sequence RSelect By Cover
RKeyword Search
Selecting using the number keypad RPlaylists (e.g. All
All)
X To make an entry: press the l button. RArtists
An input menu appears. The number of RAlbums
characters available for input depends on RTracks
the number of stored tracks. RPodcasts
X To enter a track number: press a number RGenres
key, e.g. q. RComposers
The digit is entered in the first position in RAudiobooks
the input line.
RVideos (except for Hong Kong)
i COMAND will ignore and not display an
invalid digit. i Some playback categories contain the
X Enter more numbers if desired.
entry All
All. If this entry has been selected,
The track plays after the last possible num- the entire content of the category selected
ber is entered. will be played.
i Pressing and holding a number key for The Videos category is available for iPods®
more than two seconds completes the and iPhones® (except for Hong Kong).
entry, and the corresponding track is i The functions are available as soon as the
played. entire media content has been read and
analyzed. For certain functions, such as
Fast forwarding/rewinding keyword search and selection by cover, this
X While the display/selection window is can take several minutes, depending on the
active, slide X V Y and hold the COMAND scope of media and the connected device.
controller until the desired position has If the same device is reconnected with
been reached. unchanged media content, these functions
or are available much more quickly.
X Press and hold the E or F button However, if you change the media content,
until the desired position is reached. it has to be read and analyzed again.
Calling up a category list
Example: current track list

: Symbol for next folder up
Audio
; Device icon and device name
= Track symbol
? Current title
X Select Current Tracklist by turning
to confirm.
The content of the current track list
appears.
X Select the track by turning c V d the
Example: category list
firm.
X Select Search in the basic display by slid- The track is played.
ing VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm. X To switch to the next folder up: slide XV
The category list appears. the COMAND controller.
or
i Search is not available until the device X Press the k back button.
has been activated.
i Reading: if the media content of the con- Playing back the content of a category
nected device is being read, this is indica- or folder
ted on the upper right by a symbol. When
reading has ended, the categories Select X Select the category or folder by turning
By Cover and Keyword Search are avail- c V d the COMAND controller.
able. X Press W the COMAND controller for longer
Depending on the connected device and than 2 seconds.

the size of the media content, reading may The content of the category or folder selec-
take several minutes. When the device is ted is played in accordance with the play-
next started or reconnected, the advanced back option selected (Y page 222) .
functions will be quickly available.
However, if you change the media content Alphabetical track selection
on your iPod®/iPhone®, it has to be read iPod®, iPhone® and MP3 player
and analyzed again.
This function is available for alphabetically
sorted categories and folders. This function is
Z
not available for albums or playlists, for exam- ability depends on the use and the tracks
ple. already selected.
X Select a category, e.g. Artists
Artists, by turning RKeyword Search
cVd the COMAND controller and press W Selecting keyword search allows you to
to confirm. search through all categories on the con-
The available artists are displayed. nected device for keywords.
XPress the corresponding number key once i More information on Select By Cover
or repeatedly to select the initial letter of and Keyword Search can be found under
the desired artist. For example, to select an "Music search, selecting category"
artist whose name begins with C, press the (Y page 220).
l number key three times.
The available letters are listed at the lower i For an iPod®/iPhone®, the available cov-
Audio
edge of the display. ers are added most efficiently if the entire
media content is in the current playlist. This
After a message, the first entry in the list
is the case if you have selected the play-
which matches the letter entered is high-
back option Tracks or Random Medium
lighted.
(Y page 222).
i If no corresponding entry exists, the last
entry corresponding to a previous letter is Special feature in iPod®/iPhone® mode
highlighted instead.
i iPods and MP3 players: the quality of the i If the connected iPod®/iPhone® is not
search results is highly dependent on the functioning or paused, you can search for
version and language variant of the soft- tracks but cannot select them. After con-
ware used to populate the device. A well- firming a new track, the Function
known example of such software is Unavailable message appears.
iTunes®.
If different sorting rules are defined (e.g. in Playback options
iTunes®), the search is canceled without
any result. X To select a playback option: select
Media Interface in the basic display by
Additional selection functions sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
RSelect By Cover The options list appears. The # dot indi-
Albums can be chosen by cover using the cates the option selected.
menu item. X Select an option and press W to confirm.
The first time the Select By Cover func-
tion is used, additional data must be loaded The following options are available:
from the iPod®/iPhone®. The current RNormal Track Sequence
music playback is interrupted to allow Normal track sequence: you hear the
access to this data. The process may take a tracks in their normal order (e.g. numerical
few minutes and should not be canceled. or alphabetical).
Otherwise it will start again from the begin- RRandom Medium
ning the next time Select By Cover is All the tracks on the medium are played in
selected. Covers are initially searched for in random order.
the Gracenote Media Database and are
RRandom Track List
then added to during playback from the
connected device (Y page 200). The avail-
Audio AUX mode 223
The tracks in the currently active category Audio AUX mode

or folder, including any subfolders, are
played in random order. Notes on audio AUX mode
i If the connected iPod®/iPhone® is not External audio sources may have different
functioning or paused, the playback volumes, which can mean that system mes-
options are inactive. The display of options sages such as traffic announcements and
is grayed out. navigation system announcements are much
louder. If necessary, deactivate the system
messages or adjust their volume manually.
MP3 player instructions You can connect an external audio source
(AUX) to COMAND.
General information
Depending on the vehicle model series, the
Audio
Up to 30,000 tracks per medium are suppor- connection is made using a jack in the stow-
ted. age compartment in the center console or a
You can speed up some functions and USB port (Y page 197).
improve the search results by: If COMAND is equipped with the Media Inter-
Rmaking sure the names of tracks, albums face, external audio sources are connected
and artists, for example, are written the using the cable set provided. An AUX socket
same way is not provided. The connections for the
Media Interface are located in the stowage
Rlabeling albums featuring various artists as
compartment in the center console.
"compilations"
i You will find further information online at
i Multiple entries of tracks in playlists are http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call
filtered out for some players.
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Data formats (1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Cus-
MP3 and WMA are supported as data formats tomer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for
with fixed and variable bit rates (up to Canada).
320 kbits/s).
Special considerations when using MP3 Switching to audio AUX mode

players Switching on using the DISC button
Up to eight directory levels with up to 1,000 The external device is connected to the audio
tracks per directory are supported. AUX input.
Do not use USB extension leads or adapters. X Press the h button one or more times.
They can impair functionality.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
i DRM (Digital Rights Management) protec- you can change the operating mode in the
ted files are not supported by the Media following order:
Interface.
RCD/MP3 (disc)
RMemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
Z
224 Audio AUX mode
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode Increasing the volume on COMAND

Switching modes via the audio menu

When you connect an external audio source,
audio AUX is not selected automatically.
If AUX mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
Audio
If another audio source is switched on, you X Select Volume in the AUX display by turning
can now switch to audio AUX mode in the cVd the COMAND controller and press W
audio menu. to confirm.
X Select Audio using ZV and press W to A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
confirm. current setting.
X Select Standard or Boost and press W to
X Select Aux by turning cVd and press W to confirm.
confirm. Standard: the volume of the external audio
Standard
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium source is adjusted to a standard value.
in the external audio source is played if the Boost: the volume of the external audio
Boost
source is connected and playback selec- source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
ted.
A device which is connected as an external
audio source may seem quieter or louder in
the vehicle, or the usual maximum volume
cannot be achieved. On some devices, it is
possible to adjust the volume separately. In
this case, start at a medium volume and
increase it gradually. This enables you to
determine whether the system is able to play
the music at high volume without distorting it.
Please see the respective operating instruc-

tions for how to operate the external audio
source.
Information on:
RVolume settings (Y page 29)
RSound settings (Y page 30)
225

General information ......................... 226
Basic settings .................................... 226
Video DVD mode ............................... 226
Video AUX mode ............................... 231
Picture viewer ................................... 232
Video
226 Video DVD mode
Your COMAND equipment Changing the picture format

The menu is shown.
X Select DVD-Video by sliding VÆ and turn-
going to print. Country-specific differences ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
are possible. Please note that your W to confirm.
COMAND system may not be equipped with A menu appears.
all the features described. X Select 16:9 Optimized,
Optimized 4:3 or Wide‐
screen and press W to confirm.
The dot in front of the entry indicates the
General information currently selected format.
Automatic picture shutoff X Select a setting by turning cVd the
The video image is only displayed for the
Video
firm.
driver when the transmission lever is in posi-
tion P.
SPLITVIEW allows the front passenger to view Video DVD mode
the video image (Y page 37).
When the transmission lever is disengaged Important safety notes
from position P, the following message
G WARNING
appears in the display: In order not to
distract you from the traffic situa‐ The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
tion, the picture is faded out while If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
the vehicle is in motion. there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
As soon as the selector lever of the transmis-
sion is returned to position P, the video image
is shown. Never open the housing. Always have main-
Basic settings
G WARNING
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or Handling discs while driving may distract you
color from traffic conditions. You could also lose
X In video DVD or video AUX mode, press the control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
W COMAND Controller. accident.
The menu is shown. Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-
X Select DVD-Video or Aux by turning cVd ary.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
confirm.
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers
A menu appears.
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
X Select Brightness
Brightness, Contrast or Color by every second.
press W to confirm.
X Set the value between - 5 and + 5 and press
W to confirm.
Video DVD mode 227
Notes on discs authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. This will

allow you to play video DVDs with a differ-
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. ent region code, provided that they are pro-
They could peel off and damage COMAND. duced in accordance with the PAL or NTSC
Stickers can cause the disc to bend, which standard. The region code can be changed
can result in read errors and disc recogni- up to five times.
tion problems.
! COMAND is designed to play discs that
comply with the EN 60908 standard. There- Function restrictions
fore, you can only use discs with a maxi- Depending on the DVD, it is possible that cer-
mum thickness of 1.3 mm. tain functions or actions will be temporarily
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that blocked or may not function at all. As soon as
contain data on both sides (DVD on one you try to activate these functions or actions,
side and audio data on the other), they can- you will see the K symbol in the display.
not be ejected and can damage the device.
Video
Only use round discs with a diameter of
12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of Inserting and removing DVDs
8 cm, even with an adapter. X Proceed as described in the "Inserting and
Playback problems may occur when playing ejecting CDs and DVDs" section
copied discs. There are a large variety of (Y page 196).
discs, DVD authoring software, writing soft-
ware and writers available. This variety means
that there is no guarantee that the system will Switching to video DVD mode
be able to play discs that you have copied
yourself. Switching on automatically
X Insert a video DVD.
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
DVD playback conditions starts to play it.
If video DVDs do not conform to the NTSC or
PAL TV standards, they may create picture, Switching on using the DISC button
sound or other problems during playback.
X Press the h button.
COMAND is capable of playing back video
COMAND switches to the previous disc
DVDs produced according to the following
operating mode.
standards:
By pressing the h button repeatedly, you
RRegion code 1 or region code 0 (no region can switch modes in the following order:
code)
Rvideo DVD/CD/MP3 in the single DVD
RPAL or NTSC standard
drive (disc mode)
You will generally find the relevant details
Rmemory card mode
either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.
RMUSIC REGISTER
i If you insert a video DVD with a different RUSB storage device
region code, you will see a message to this
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
effect.
i COMAND is set to region code 1 at the
factory. This setting can be changed at an
Z
228 Video DVD mode
X Select Media by sliding VÆ and turning Showing/hiding the menu

to confirm. X To show: in full-screen DVD video mode,
press W the COMAND controller.
X Select a ý video DVD from the media list
(Y page 230). or
X Select Menu while the control menu is
Switching on with the video menu shown and press W to confirm.
X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
X Select Video in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND and confirm Full Screen by pressing W.
Video DVD mode is switched on.
Showing/hiding the control menu

Video
X To show: in DVD video mode, slide ZVÆ

X To hide: slide ZVÆ the COMAND control-
ler.
or
Menu shown
X Wait for approximately eight seconds. : Video DVD options
; Pause function
= Stop function
? Media selection
A Sound settings
i This function is not available while the
DVD's own menu is being displayed.
Fast forwarding/rewinding
Control menu displayed

X In full-screen DVD video mode, slide XVY
and hold the COMAND controller until the
: Type of data medium
desired position is reached.
; Current title
or
= Current scene
X Press and hold the E or F button
? Track time
until the desired position is reached.
A Shows the menu You see the control menu.
i This function is not available while the
DVD's own menu is being displayed.
Video DVD mode 229
Stop function X To skip forwards or back: in full screen

mode, turn cVd the COMAND controller.
X Show the menu (Y page 228).
or
X To interrupt playback: select É by
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller.
press W to confirm. or
The Ë display changes to Ì. The X Press the E or F button on the con-
video image is hidden. trol panel.
X To continue playback: select Ì and The navigation menu (Y page 228) appears
press W to confirm. for approximately eight seconds.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
Selecting a film/track
X To stop playback: while playback is inter-
rupted, select É again and press W to
confirm.
Video
or
X During playback, confirm É by pressing
W twice in rapid succession.
Ì is selected.
X To restart playback: confirm Ì by
pressing W.
Playback restarts from the beginning.
DVD function menu
Pause function This function is only available if the DVD is
divided into several films/titles. If the DVD
X Show the menu (Y page 228). contains several films, these can be selected
X To pause playback: select Ë by turn- directly. A film can be selected either when
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press the DVD is being played back or when it is
W to confirm. stopped.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The film can also be selected from the menu
X To continue playback: select Ì and on the DVD itself.
press W to confirm. X Show the menu (Y page 228).
The menu is hidden.
X Select DVD-Video by turning cVd the
firm.
Selecting a scene/chapter
X Select DVD Functions and press W to
If the film is divided into scenes or chapters, confirm.
you can select them directly while the film is A menu appears.
running, or skip forwards step by step. Some X Select Title Selection by turning cVd
DVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g. the COMAND controller and press W to
during the opening credits). confirm.
It may also be possible to select the scene/ X Select a film/title and press W to confirm.
chapter from within the menu stored on the
DVD.
Z
230 Video DVD mode
Selecting a video DVD from the media Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
list
X Select Media by sliding VÆ and turning
to confirm.
The media list appears. The # dot indicates
the current medium being played. Video
DVDs are indicated by the ý icon.
COMAND loads the video DVD and begins
playing it. X Show the DVD menu (Y page 230).
i If you select a CD or an MP3 medium, you X Select a menu item by sliding ZVÆ the
Video
switch to the respective audio mode. COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
Further information on the media list
(Y page 198). or
X Select a menu item by sliding XVY the
DVD menu firm.
The menu appears.
Calling up the DVD menu
XTo reconfirm your selection: confirm
The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD Select by pressing W.
itself. It is structured in various ways accord-
COMAND carries out the action.
ing to the individual DVD and permits certain
actions and settings. Make a selection from the further options,
if necessary.
In the case of multi-language DVDs, for exam-
COMAND then switches back to the DVD
ple, you can change the DVD language in the
menu.
DVD menu.
i Menu items which cannot be selected are
shown in gray.
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W i Depending on the DVD, the menu items:
to confirm. Back (to movie),
movie) Play
Play, Stop
Stop, K,
L or Go Up may either not function at all
or may not function at certain points in the
confirm.
DVD menu. To indicate this, the K symbol
X Select Menu and press W to confirm.
appears in the display.
The DVD menu appears.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu
X Show the DVD menu (Y page 230).
X Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu and press W the COMAND con-
troller to confirm.
or
Video AUX mode 231
X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and Subtitles and camera angle
press W the COMAND controller to con-
firm. These functions are not available on all DVDs.
The number of subtitle languages and camera
X Select Go Up and press W to confirm.
angles available depends on the content of
the DVD. It may also be possible to access the
Back to the film settings from the DVD menu.
X Press the k back button repeatedly X Show the DVD menu (Y page 230).
until you see the movie. X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
or cVd the COMAND controller and press W
X Select the corresponding menu item from to confirm.
the DVD menu. X Select DVD Functions and press W to
confirm.
X Select the Back (to movie) menu item in
X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and
the menu and press W to confirm.
press W to confirm.
Video
In both cases, a menu appears. The # dot in
front of an entry indicates the current set-
Setting the language and audio for-
ting.
mat
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it COMAND controller and press W to con-
is available, you can set the DVD menu lan- firm.
guage, the audio language or the audio for-
mat. The number of settings is determined by
the DVD content. It is possible that the set- Interactive content
tings may also be accessed in the DVD menu
(Y page 230). DVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. a
X Show the DVD menu (Y page 230).
video game). In a video game, for example,
you may be able to influence events by select-
X In full-screen mode, press W the COMAND
ing and triggering actions. The type and num-
controller to show the menu. ber of actions depend on the DVD.
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
X Select an action by sliding ZVÆ or XVY the
COMAND controller and press W to exe-
to confirm.
cute it.
A menu appears and the first entry, Select
Select,
confirm. is highlighted.
X Select Menu Language or Audio Lan‐ X Press W the COMAND controller.
guage and press W to confirm.
In both cases, a menu appears after a few
seconds. The # dot in front of an entry indi- Video AUX mode
cates the currently selected language.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the Connecting external video sources
COMAND controller and press W to con- External video sources may have different
firm. volumes, which can mean that system mes-
sages such as traffic announcements and
navigation system announcements are much
louder. If necessary, deactivate the system
messages or adjust their volume manually.
Z
232 Picture viewer
If your vehicle is equipped with Media Inter- Showing/hiding the menu

face, you can connect an external video
source (AUX video) (Y page 217). X To show: in video AUX mode, press W the
COMAND controller.
The 1/8 inch audio/video jacks are in the
X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
center console stowage compartment.
and confirm Full Screen by pressing W.
i In vehicles with a rear view camera, the
AUX video jack cannot be used for external
video sources. Volume and sound settings
Information on:
Switching to AUX video mode RVolume settings (Y page 29)
RSound settings (Y page 30)
i A device which is connected as an exter-
nal video source may seem quieter or
Video
louder in the vehicle, or the usual maximum

volume cannot be achieved. On some devi-
ces, it is possible to adjust the volume sep-
arately. In this case, start at a medium vol-
ume and increase it gradually. This enables
you to determine whether the system is
able to play the sound at high volume with-
AUX video mode out distorting it.
X Press the h function button repeatedly
until Media Interface mode is selected. Increasing the volume on COMAND
or
X Show the video AUX menu (Y page 232).
X Select Video in the main function bar by
turning c V d the COMAND controller and X Select Volume by turning cVd the
press W to confirm. COMAND controller and press W to con-
If AUX video mode was the last mode selec- firm.
ted, it will now be active. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
If another video source is switched on, you
can now switch to AUX video mode in the X Select Standard or Boost and press W to
video menu. confirm.
X Select Video and press W to confirm. Standard: the volume of the external video
Standard
X Select Aux and press W to confirm.
source is adjusted to a standard value.
The AUX video menu appears. You will hear Boost: the volume of the external video
Boost
and see the content of the external video source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
source if it is connected and switched to
playback.
Picture viewer
Introduction
If there are pictures on the active data
medium, you can look at them. You can dis-
Picture viewer 233
play pictures with a resolution of up to 20 X Select a photo and press W to confirm.

megapixels. The photo is displayed and the music is
stopped.
Data medium Supported picture
formats
CD/DVD with pic- bmp, jpeg, jpg, png
ture files
USB devices (sticks, bmp, jpeg, jpg, png
hard drives)
SD memory card
Calling up a category list

Select a data medium with pictures (e.g. a
Video
X
memory card):
Changing the picture view
Rin the Audio menu (Y page 186)
Rin the media list (Y page 198)
X Select Search in the basic display by slid-

ing VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
The category list appears (Y page 204).
Displaying pictures
X Select (Y page 204) Photos in the category
list by turning cVd the COMAND controller
X While viewing a picture (Y page 233), press
A folder directory appears. W the COMAND controller.
A menu appears.
X Select a folder with photos and press W to
confirm.
X To turn the picture clockwise: confirm
The folder displays the existing picture files Turn Clockwise by pressing W the
(example). COMAND controller.
X To turn the picture counter-clockwise:
select Turn Counterclockwise by turn-
W to confirm.
X To zoom into a picture: select Zoom by
turning the cVd COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
After you have zoomed into the picture, you
can move the section of the picture.
X Slide ZVÆ and XVY the COMAND control-
ler.
Z
234 Picture viewer
X To revert to the original size: press W the

COMAND controller.
or
X Press the k button.
Exiting the picture viewer

X Select Back To Menu in the menu by turn-
W to confirm.
Video
235

Overview ............................................ 236
Basic functions ................................. 241

System settings ................................ 243
CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode ........ 244
Video DVD mode ............................... 247
Operation with an active COMAND
source ................................................ 252
AUX mode .......................................... 254
236 Overview
Your COMAND equipment your vehicle, please refer to the separate prin-
ted operating instructions .
COMAND system, as available at the time of Components

going to print. Country-specific differences The Rear Seat Entertainment System
are possible. Please note that your includes:
Rtwo screens for the rear behind the front-
seat head restraints
Rtwo remote controls
Overview Ra CD/DVD drive
RAUX jacks on both screens (AUX display)
Important safety notes
and on the CD/DVD drive (AUX drive)
G WARNING Rtwo sets of cordless headphones
Never open the housing. Always have main-
G WARNING
If objects such as headphones/headsets or
external audio/video sources are not secured
in the passenger compartment, they can be
flung around and hit vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury, for example in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direc-
tion.
Always stow these items or similar objects
carefully so that they cannot be flung around,
for example in a lockable vehicle stowage
compartment.
equipment
Observe that a range of Rear Seat Entertain-
ment Systems are available for Mercedes-
Benz vehicles. In this Operator's Manual, the
Rear Seat Entertainment System Code 864 is
used for illustration purposes. If you have a
different Rear Seat Entertainment System in
Overview 237
Rear-compartment screens

: AUX jacks, detailed view in the "CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks" section (Y page 238).
; Display
Remote control i Two remote controls are supplied for the

US and Canadian markets.
Overview
Selecting the screen for the remote con-
trol
The remote control can be used to operate
one of the two rear-compartment screens or
SPLITVIEW for the front passenger. To do so,
you must switch the remote control to the
desired screen (Y page 237).
X To select the left-hand screen: turn thumb-
wheel = until "L REAR" is highlighted in the
window.
X To select the right-hand screen: turn
thumbwheel = until "R REAR" is highligh-
ted in the window.
X To select SPLITVIEW: turn thumbwheel =
until "SPLITVIEW" is highlighted in the win-
: Switches the screen on/off dow.
; Switches the button lighting on/off
= Selects the screen for the remote control Switching the screen on/off
? Selects a menu or menu item
If the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the
A Confirms a selection or setting ignition lock (see vehicle Operator's Manual),
B Switches the sound on or off or if it is not in the ignition lock, the rear-com-
C Adjusts the volume partment screens will switch off after
D Skips to a track, fast-forward/fast-rewind 30 minutes. Before the screens switch off,
E Selects a track; direct entry they show a message to this effect.
F Exits a menu (back) You can switch the screens back on. How-
ever, this will discharge the starter battery.
Z
238 Overview
X Point the remote control at the rear-com- CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks
partment screen which has been selected
for remote operation.
X Press button : on the remote control
(Y page 237).
The respective rear-compartment screen
switches on or off.
i You can only switch the screens on using
the remote control if the ignition is
switched on.
Switching the button lighting on/off

: CD/DVD slot
X Press button ; on the remote control
; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(Y page 237).
(red)
Depending on the previous status, the but-
ton lighting is switched on or off. = AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
(white)
i If you do not use the remote control for ? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
about 15 seconds, the button lighting A CD/DVD eject button
switches off automatically.
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.
Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand
Switching the sound on or off
side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX
X Press button B on the remote control display) (Y page 237).
(Y page 237).
The sound is switched on/off.
Selecting a menu/menu item and con-

firming your selection
X Select a menu/menu item using the
=;9: buttons on the
remote control and press the 9 button to
confirm.
Overview 239
Cordless headphones
Overview

X To adjust the headphones: open both sides of the headphones.
X Adjust the fitting of the headphones by pulling the headphone band in the direction of the
arrow.
X To switch the headphones on/off: press on/off switch ;.
X To adjust the volume: turn volume control = until the desired volume is set. If you have
connected corded headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you can adjust the volume
using the remote control (Y page 237).
X To check the battery condition of charge: check the state of the batteries using indicator
lamp :.
i To preserve the batteries, the headphones automatically switch off if they have not
received an audio signal for approximately 3 minutes.
Indicator lamp on the cordless head- LED dis- Status

phones play
The color of the indicator lamp shows:
Flashing The headphones are search-
Rwhether the device is switched on or off ing for the connection to a
Rthe condition of the inserted batteries screen.
LED dis- Status No display The headphones are switched
play (dark) off or the batteries are dis-
charged.
Green The batteries are fine.
Red The batteries are almost dis- i The function of the headphones may be
charged. impaired by other radio-based electronic
devices such as mobile phones or laptops.
Lit continu- The headphones are switched
ously on and connected to a screen.
Z
240 Overview
Selecting the screen for the head- H Environmental note

phones Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with

the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
Batteries are required for the remote control

and for the two sets of cordless headphones.
X Slide switch : to L (left-hand screen) or R The batteries can be replaced (Y page 240).
(right-hand screen).
Replacing the batteries of the remote
Connecting additional headphones control
Up to two cordless headphones can be used

at the same time for each screen.
You can also connect one additional set of
corded headphones to each of the two rear-
compartment screens (Y page 237). The
socket is designed for headphones with a
3.5 mm stereo jack plug and an impedance of
32 ohms.
Replacing batteries
Notes
G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in : Battery compartment
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal ; Catch tab
injury. = Battery compartment cover
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If ? Retaining lugs
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention A Batteries
immediately.
The remote control contains 2 type AAA, 1.5 V
batteries.
Basic functions 241
X To open the battery compartment: X To open the battery compartment: turn

remove battery compartment cover = on battery compartment cover : counter-
the back of the remote control. clockwise and remove.
X To do so, press down retaining lug ; and X Remove the discharged batteries from the

take off battery compartment cover =. tray.
X Remove discharged batteries A from the X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polar-
tray. ity markings on the batteries and battery
X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polar- tray when doing so.
ity markings on the batteries and battery X To close the battery compartment:
compartment when doing so. replace battery housing cover : and turn
Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+) it clockwise until it engages.
must face upwards. If the batteries have been inserted cor-
Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+) rectly, the indicator lamp will light up green
must face downwards. when the headphones are switched on.
X To close the battery compartment:
i The operating duration of the headphones
insert battery compartment cover = start- with a set of batteries is up to 40 hours.
ing with retaining lugs ? into the battery
compartment and allow catch tab ; to
engage in place. Basic functions
Replacing cordless headphone batter- Using headphones

ies You can use the cordless headphones sup-
plied and/or up to two sets of corded head-
phones connected to the corresponding jack
of the rear-compartment screens
(Y page 237).
Information on the cordless headphones
(Y page 239).
Using the main loudspeakers

This function is available in conjunction with
COMAND.
You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to lis-
ten to a disc inserted in the rear-compartment
drive. To do so, at least one of the rear-com-
partment screens must be set to disc mode.
X To set on COMAND: press the $ but-
The battery compartment is located on the
left headphone. The cordless headphones ton, for example, to switch on an audio
require two type AAA, 1.5 V batteries. mode.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND
The Audio menu appears.
X Select Rear by turning cVd the COMAND
Z
242 Basic functions
i The headphones' volume setting does not The following functions affect only one
affect the main loudspeakers. screen:
Raudio and video functions as well as picture
settings
Selecting sound settings

Rswitching between full screen and the
You can select the sound settings in the CD/ menu
MP3, video DVD and AUX modes.
X Switch on an operating mode (e.g. audio Switching between operating modes
CD mode) (Y page 244). When you exit an operating mode (e.g. audio
X Select Treble or Bass using CD mode), the current setting is saved. If you
the :=; buttons on the remote call up this operating mode again later, there
control and press the 9 button to confirm. are two possibilities:
Rthe operating mode has been changed on
X Select a setting using the 9: but-
the other screen.
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Rthe operating mode has not been changed.
In the first case, the operating mode appears
Multiple users as it is on the other screen.
In the second case, the setting appears on the
Simultaneous use of the rear-compart- screen as it was when you last exited the
ment disc drive operating mode.
The two rear-compartment screens can be
operated almost entirely independently from
Picture settings
one another. However, there can be a conflict
in some menus if the two screens are used Overview
simultaneously.
You can select picture settings in video DVD
If the rear-compartment disc drive is being
and AUX mode (Y page 254).
used for both screens simultaneously, select-
ing certain menus or settings on one of the
screens also affects the other screen. Adjusting the brightness, contrast and
color
The following functions affect both screens:
Rchanging playback options
Rselecting a track (from a track list or folder)
Rusing the play, pause and stop functions
Rfast forwarding/rewinding or scrolling
Rcalling up the DVD menu and navigating
within it
Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera
angle
Rcalling up interactive DVD content
Example: TV mode
: Brightness, contrast and color
; Picture formats
System settings 243
X Switch on video DVD mode (Y page 247). Selecting the display language
X To show the menu: press the 9 button on X Select System using the 9=;
the remote control. buttons on the remote control and press 9

or to confirm.
X While the navigation menu is shown, You see the system menu on the selected
(Y page 228) select Menu and press the 9 rear screen.
button to confirm.
X Select Settings using the : button
X Select DVD-Video using and press 9 to confirm.
the :=; buttons and press the X Select Language using the 9: but-
9 button to confirm. tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Brightness
Brightness, Contrast or Color The list of languages appears. A # dot
using the 9: buttons and press the indicates the current setting.
9 button to confirm. X Select a language using the 9: but-
An adjustment scale appears. tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select a setting using the 9: but- The Rear Seat Entertainment System acti-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm. vates the selected language.
Changing the picture format Switching the display design

X To show the menu: press the 9 button on X Select Settings using the : button
the remote control. and press 9 to confirm.
or X Select Day Mode,
Mode Night Mode or Auto‐
X While the navigation menu is shown, matic using the 9: buttons and
(Y page 228) select Menu and press the 9 press the 9 button to confirm.
button to confirm. The dot indicates the current setting.
X Select DVD-Video using
Design Explanation
the :=; buttons and press the
9 button to confirm. Day Mode The display is set per-
The dot in front of one of the menu items manently to day
16:9 Optimized
Optimized, 4:3 or Widescreen indi- design.
cates the format currently selected.
Night Mode The display is set per-
X Select a format using the 9: but-
manently to night
tons and press the 9 button to confirm. design.
Automatic The display design
System settings changes depending on
the vehicle instrument
Note cluster illumination.
You can adjust almost all system settings
individually for each screen without affecting
the other screen. You make these settings
using the remote control (Y page 237).
Z
244 CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode
Setting the brightness Inserting a CD/DVD

X Select Settings using the : button
and press 9 to confirm.
X Select Brightness using the 9:

buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
A scale appears.
X Adjust the brightness using the 9:
The brightness bar moves up or down. The
picture becomes lighter or darker in
accordance with the scale.
: Disc slot
; Disc eject button
Showing/hiding the picture
Depending on the vehicle model and equip-
X To hide the picture: select Display Off ment level, the CD/DVD drive is found:
in the system menu using the :; Rbehind the center console in a folding com-
buttons on the remote control and press partment, or
the 9 button to confirm. Runder the rear bench seat, or
The picture is hidden.
Rin the stowage box between the rear seats
X To display the picture: press the 9 but-
The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If
ton. there is already a disc inserted, this must be
ejected before another is inserted.
CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode X Insert a disc into the disc slot.
The printed side of the disc must face
Important safety notes upwards. If neither side of the disc is prin-
ted, the side you wish to play must face
G WARNING
downwards.
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc.
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser The CD/DVD drive plays the disc:
radiation. This laser radiation could damage Rif it has been inserted correctly and is a
your retina. There is a risk of injury. permissible disc, and
Never open the housing. Always have main- Rafter you have switched to disc mode
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- (audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 mode)
fied specialist workshop. (Y page 245)
Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loaded by
the drive. Loading may take some time,
General notes depending on the number of folders and
You will find information on the following top- tracks.
ics in the Audio section:
Rnotes on CDs/DVDs (Y page 204)
Rnotes on MP3 mode (Y page 202)
Rnotes on copyright (Y page 204)
CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode 245
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or structure, allowing you to select any track on
MP3 mode the MP3 CD.
X Select Track List (audio CD/DVD mode)
X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 244).
or Folder (MP3 mode) using

The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the inserted disc. the :=; buttons on the remote
control, and confirm by pressing the 9
X Select Disc in the menu using the
button.
9=; buttons on the remote
control and confirm by pressing the 9 or
button. X Press the 9 button when the display/
The corresponding mode is switched on. selection window is active.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System plays The track list appears. The # dot indicates
the disc. the current track.
i Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result

X Select a track using the 9: buttons
in the elapsed time shown being different and press the 9 button to confirm.
from the actual elapsed time.
Making a selection by entering the track
number directly
Selecting a track X Press the h button on the remote con-
Selecting by skipping to a track trol.
The track entry display appears.
X To skip forwards or backwards to a
track: press the = or ; button on Example: track 2
the remote control. X Press number button 2.
or Example: track 12
X Press the corresponding number keys in
The skip forward function skips to the next
rapid succession.
track.
If the elapsed track time has passed 8 sec- XWait for approximately three seconds after
onds, the function skips back to the begin- making the entry.
ning of the track. If the elapsed time is You will hear the track which has been
shorter, it will skip to the start of the pre- entered. The corresponding basic menu
vious track. then reappears.
If the Random Tracks or Random Folder i It is not possible to enter numbers that
playback option has been selected, the exceed the number of tracks on the CD or in
track order is random. the currently active folder.
Selecting by track list

In audio CD mode, the track list contains all
X With the display/selection window active,
tracks on the disc currently playing. In audio
press the = or ; button on the
DVD mode, the track list contains all tracks in
the currently active group.
In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks in
the currently active folder as well as the folder
Z
246 CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode
remote control repeatedly until you reach

the desired position.
or
Press and hold the E or F button
X
until the desired position is reached.
Selecting a folder
This function is only available in MP3 mode.
X Select Folder in MP3 mode using
: Folder selection symbol
the :=; buttons on the remote
; Folder symbol
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select a folder using the 9: buttons
or
and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Press the 9 button when the display/ You will see the tracks in the folder.
selection window is active. X Select a track using the 9: buttons
The folder content appears.
The track is played and the corresponding
folder is now the active folder.
Pause function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
X To pause playback: select Ë using
: Folder selection symbol The Ë display changes to Ì.
; Current folder name
X To continue playback: select Ì and
= Track symbol press the 9 button to confirm.
X To switch to the superordinate folder: The Ì display changes to Ë.
select symbol : using the 9: but-
tons on the remote control and press the
9 button to confirm.
Stop function
The display shows the next folder up.
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
Video DVD mode 247
X To interrupt playback: select É using X Select CD

CD, DVD-Audio or MP3 using
the :=; buttons on the remote the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm. control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The options list appears. The # dot indi-

X To continue playback: select Ì and cates the option currently selected.
press the 9 button to confirm. XSelect Normal Track Sequence
Sequence, Random
Playback continues from the point where it Tracks or Random Folder using the
was interrupted. 9: buttons and press the 9 button
X To stop playback: while playback is inter- to confirm.
rupted, select É again and press the 9 The option is switched on. For all options
button to confirm. except Normal Track Sequence,
Sequence you will
Playback stops and returns to the begin- see a corresponding display in the display/
ning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted. selection window.
X To restart playback: select Ì and i If you switch the data carrier which you
press the 9 button to confirm. are currently listening to, the Normal
Playback starts from the beginning of the Track Sequence option is activated auto-
DVD. matically. If an option is selected, it
remains selected after the Rear Seat Enter-
tainment System is switched on or off.
Setting the audio format
The content of an audio DVD can be divided Switching track information on/off
into up to 9 groups. The availability and type (MP3 mode only)
of group depends on the respective DVD. A
If the function is switched on, folder and track
group can contain music in different sound
names are displayed.
qualities (stereo and multichannel formats,
for example), or bonus tracks. If the function is switched off, disc and file
names are displayed.
X Select DVD-Audio using
X Select MP3 using the :=; but-
control and press 9 to confirm. tons on the remote control and press the
X Select Group using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Display Track Information
The list of available audio formats appears. using the 9: buttons and press the
The # dot indicates the format currently 9 button to confirm.
selected. The function is switched on O or off ª,
X Select an audio format using the 9: depending on the previous status.
X To exit the menu: press the = or ;
button. Video DVD mode
Important safety notes
Playback options G WARNING
Further information on playback options is
available in the "Audio" section (Y page 202).
Z
248 Video DVD mode
radiation. This laser radiation could damage the menu stored on the DVD appears. If the
your retina. There is a risk of injury. DVD menu appears, you must start the film
Never open the housing. Always have main- manually.
X Select the corresponding menu item in the

fied specialist workshop. DVD menu.
General notes Showing/hiding the control menu
DVD playback conditions

Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs. There is a large variety of discs,
DVD authoring software, writing software and
writers available. This variety means that
there is no guarantee that the Rear Seat
Entertainment System will be able to play
video DVDs that you have copied yourself.
Further information can be found under video
(Y page 227). Information regarding
COMAND also applies to the Rear Seat Enter- Control menu displayed
tainment System. : Type of data medium
; Current title
Function restrictions = Current scene
? Track time
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that cer-
tain functions or actions described in this A Shows the menu
section will be temporarily blocked or may not X To show: press the 9 or : button on
function at all. As soon as you try to activate the remote control.
these functions or actions, you will see the K
symbol in the display.
X To hide: press the 9 or : button.
or
X Wait about eight seconds.
Switching to video DVD mode
X Insert a video DVD (Y page 244).
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the disc.
If disc mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as
described in the following instruction.
X Select Disc in the menu using the
control and confirm by pressing the 9
button.
If the video DVD fulfills the playback crite-
ria, the film either starts automatically or
Video DVD mode 249
Showing/hiding the menu X To pause playback: select Ë and press

the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.

X To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The menu is hidden.
Stop function
X To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
Example: menu shown or
: Video DVD options X Select Menu while the control menu is
; Pause function shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
= Stop function X To interrupt playback: select É and
? Media selection press the 9 button to confirm.
A Sound settings The Ë display changes to Ì. The
X To show: press the 9 button on the video image is hidden.
remote control. X To continue playback: select Ì and
or press the 9 button to confirm.

Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted. The menu is hidden.
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
X To stop playback: while playback is inter-
X To hide: press the 9 button, select rupted, select É again and press the 9
Full Screen and press the 9 button to button to confirm.
confirm. Playback stops and returns to the begin-
ning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
X To restart playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Press and hold the E or F button on Playback starts from the beginning of the
the remote control until the desired posi- DVD.
tion has been reached.
You see the control menu.
Selecting a scene/chapter
Pause function General notes

X To show the menu: press the 9 button on Observe the information on DVD video mode
the remote control. (Y page 229).
or
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
Z
250 Video DVD mode
Skipping forwards/backwards
X Press the = or ; button on the
remote control.
or
The navigation menu (Y page 228) appears
for approximately eight seconds.
Selecting a scene/chapter directly

These examples illustrate how to select X Select DVD Functions and press the 9
scene/chapter 5. button to confirm.
X Option 1: while the film is playing, press X Select Title Selection and press the 9
the h button on the remote control. button to confirm.
X Press the corresponding number key, such X To call up the selection list: press the 9
as 5. button.
X Option 2: while the film is playing, press X Select a film/title.
the 9 button on the remote control and Option 2:
show the menu.
Example: selecting film 2
X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button to
confirm. X Press button 2.
X Select DVD Functions and press the 9
After a brief pause, the second film is
played.
button to confirm.
X Select Scene Selection and press the 9
button to confirm.
DVD menu
X Select 5 using the 9 or : button and
press the 9 button to confirm. Calling up the DVD menu
In both cases, playback will begin from the
The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD
fifth scene/chapter after a brief pause.
itself. It is structured in various ways accord-
ing to the individual DVD and permits certain
actions and settings.
Selecting a film/track
In the case of multi-language DVDs, for exam-
Option 1: ple, you can change the DVD language in the
X Press the 9 button on the remote control DVD menu.
and show the menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control
X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button and show the menu.
on the remote control to confirm. X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button
on the remote control to confirm.
button to confirm.
X Select Menu and press the 9 button to
confirm.
The DVD menu appears.
Video DVD mode 251
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu X To skip to the end of a scene: select the
F menu item and press the 9 button to
confirm.
X To skip to the beginning of a scene:

select the E menu item and press the
Moving up one level in the DVD menu

X Show the DVD menu.
X Press the % back button on the remote
control or select the corresponding menu
X Select a menu item using the item in the DVD menu.
9:=; buttons on the or
remote control and press the 9 button to X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
confirm. press W the COMAND controller to con-
A menu appears. firm.
X Confirm Select by pressing the 9 button. X Select Go Up and press W to confirm.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System car-
ries out the action or shows a submenu. Back to the film
X If available, additional options can now be
X Press the k button repeatedly until you
selected. see the movie.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System then
switches back to the DVD menu. or
X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
i Menu items which cannot be selected are press 9 to confirm.
shown in gray. X Select the Back (to the movie) menu
i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: item in the menu and press the 9 button to
Back (to the movie)
movie), Play
Play, Stop
Stop, E, confirm.
F or Go Up may either not function at all
or may not function at certain points in the
DVD menu. To indicate this, the K symbol Setting the audio format
appears in the display. This function is not available on all DVDs. If it
is available, you can set the audio language or
Stopping a film or skipping to the begin- the audio format. The number of settings is
ning or end of a scene determined by the DVD content. It may also
X Select any menu item from the DVD menu. be possible to access the settings from the
The menu appears. DVD menu.
X To stop the film: select the Stop menu X Press the 9 button on the remote control
item and press the 9 button on the remote and show the menu.
control to confirm. X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button
on the remote control to confirm.
button to confirm.
Z
252 Operation with an active COMAND source
X Select Audio Language and press the 9 remote control and press the 9 button to
button to confirm. execute it.
A menu appears after a short while. The # A menu appears and the first entry, Select
Select,
dot in front of an entry indicates the cur- is highlighted.
rently selected language. X Press the 9 button.

X Select a language using the 9: but-
X To exit the menu: press the = or ; Operation with an active COMAND
button. source
Switching the function on/off in
COMAND
Subtitles and camera angle
You can transfer an audio or video source
These functions are not available on all DVDs. selected in COMAND to the Rear Seat Enter-
The number of subtitle languages and camera tainment System. If you subsequently switch
angles available depends on the content of modes in COMAND, the new source will not
the DVD. It may also be possible to access the be transmitted to the Rear Seat Entertain-
settings from the DVD menu. ment System.
X Press the 9 button on the remote control X To switch on the function in COMAND:
and show the menu. switch to the desired audio mode in
X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button COMAND, e.g. CD mode (Y page 197), or
on the remote control to confirm. show the menu in video DVD mode
X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 (Y page 228).
button to confirm. X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ
press the 9 button to confirm. and turning cVd the COMAND controller
In both cases, a menu appears after a few and press W to confirm.
seconds. The # dot in front of an entry
indicates the current setting.
X Select a setting using the 9: but-
X To exit the menu: press the = or ;
button.
Interactive content
DVDs can also contain interactive content
(e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may X Select Active Aud./Vid. Source For
be able to influence events by selecting and Rear and press W to confirm.
triggering actions. The type and number of In the status bar at the top, you will see the
actions depend on the DVD. headphones icon and the _ icon for the
X Select an action using the source that has been switched on.
9;:= buttons on the X To switch off the function in COMAND:
switch on the desired audio mode in
Operation with an active COMAND source 253
COMAND or show the menu in video DVD Audio CD mode

mode.
X To select by skipping to a track: press
X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
the = or ; button.
e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ

or
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm. X Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
X Select Rear Audio/Video Off _ and track.
press W the COMAND controller to con-
If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8
firm.
seconds, the function skips back to the
beginning of the track.
If the elapsed track time is less than 8 sec-
Selecting an active COMAND source
onds, the function skips back to the begin-
on the rear-compartment screen
ning of the previous track.
Loading the active COMAND source Additional setting option:
RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 242)
Audio DVD mode

X To skip to the next/previous group:
press the : button on the remote con-
trol.
X To select K L: highlight using the
= or ; button and press 9.
Additional setting option:
X Select COMAND using the 9=;
buttons on the remote control and press 9
to confirm. MP3 mode
The audio or video source selected in X To select a track by skipping to a track:
COMAND is loaded in the Rear Seat Enter- press the = or ; button on the
tainment System. remote control.
When the loading process is complete, the or
audio or video source is set in the Rear Seat X Press the E or F button.
Entertainment System. The skip forward function skips to the next
If Rear Audio/Video Off is activated in track.
COMAND, the COMAND is off or there If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8
is no active COMAND source message seconds, the function skips back to the
appears. beginning of the track.
If the elapsed track time is less than 8 sec-
onds, the function skips back to the begin-
ning of the previous track.
Z
254 AUX mode
X To select a folder: press the : button Connecting AUX equipment

on the remote control.
X Highlight one of the two folder symbols
AUX drive
with the = or ; button and press 9 The AUX drive jacks are located on the
to confirm. CD/DVD drive next to the CD/DVD eject but-

Depending on your selection, the previous ton (Y page 238).
or next folder is selected and the first track
is played. Displaying AUX
Additional setting option: The AUX display jacks are on the side of the
RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 242) screen (Y page 237).
Video DVD mode Audio and video connection

X To hide a menu: confirm Menu with the 9 X Insert the audio plugs for the left and right
button. signals into the corresponding L and R
The video image is played in full screen jacks.
mode. X Insert the video plug into the V jack.
Additional setting options:
RAdjusting the brightness, contrast and
color (Y page 242) Activating AUX mode
RChanging the picture format (Y page 243)
AUX drive
X Select Aux in the menu using the
AUX mode control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The AUX menu appears.
Introduction
X Select Source from the AUX menu and
You can connect one external video source to press the 9 button to confirm.
each of the displays of the Rear Seat Enter- X Select Disc Drive Aux and press the 9
tainment System (AUX display) and also one button to confirm.
external video source to the rear-compart- You will hear and see the content of the
ment CD/DVD drive (AUX drive) with a sound external video source if it is connected to
and video signal. the CD/DVD drive and switched to play-
Please see the corresponding operating back. If no video image is available from the
instructions for information on how to oper- AUX source connected, you will see an
ate the external video source. audio menu.
For further details about external video sour-
ces, please consult an authorized Mercedes- Displaying AUX
Benz Center.
X Select the screen by turning the scroll
wheel on the remote control (Y page 237)
AUX mode 255
until "L REAR " (left screen) or "REAR R" Changing the picture format
(right screen) is highlighted in the window.
X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux in
X Select Aux in the menu using the
the AUX menu and press the 9 button to

confirm.
X Select 16:9 Optimized,
Optimized 4:3 or Wide‐
X Select Source from the AUX menu and
screen using the 9: buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm. press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Display Aux and press the 9 but- The dot in front of a menu item indicates
ton to confirm. the current setting.
You will see and hear the content of the
video source if it is switched to playback. If
no video image is available from the AUX
source connected, you will see an audio
menu.
Adjusting treble and bass

X Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu
and press the 9 button on the remote
control to confirm.
X Select a setting using the 9 or :
button and press the 9 button to confirm.
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or

color
X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux in
the AUX menu and press the 9 button to
confirm.
X Select Brightness
Brightness, Contrast or Color
X Select a setting using the 9 or :
button and press the 9 button to confirm.
Z
256
257

Introduction ...................................... 258
Switching the SIRIUS Weather dis-
play on/off ........................................ 258
Displaying detailed information ...... 259
Selecting the area for the weather
forecast ............................................. 259
Memory functions ............................. 261
Weather map ..................................... 262
SIRIUS Weather
258 Switching the SIRIUS Weather display on/off
Your COMAND equipment i The rain radar cannot be displayed for

Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.
These operating instructions describe all the i Hurricane: term used to describe the trop-
standard and optional equipment for your ical cyclones that primarily develop in the
COMAND system, as available at the time of Atlantic, North Pacific and South Pacific
going to print. Country-specific differences oceans. The wind speeds are above 74 mph
are possible. Please note that your (118 km/h). Five categories are used to
COMAND system may not be equipped with classify the strength of a hurricane.
Typhoon: term used to describe a tropical
cyclone that develops in the northwestern
Introduction Pacific. The wind speeds are in the category
of a hurricane.
i This function is currently not available for
Canada.
SIRIUS Weather
Switching the SIRIUS Weather display

For the reception of weather forecasts via on/off
satellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM Sat-
ellite Weather subscription. Switching on
When the Call SIRIUS to activate sys‐
tem at 888-539-7474 message with the
SIRIUS device identification number appears,
you will first have to obtain access to the
weather service. A description of the proce-
dure can be found in the "Registering satellite
radio" section (Y page 191).
COMAND can receive weather forecasts via
satellite radio for the entire USA (including
Alaska and Hawaii). The received weather
data can be displayed as an information chart
(daily forecast, five-day forecast, detailed
information) or on the weather map.
The weather data received from a weather
station is stored in COMAND for one hour. It
can therefore be displayed again immediately
after restarting the engine (for example after
refueling).
The weather map can display the following
weather data with symbols:
Rrainradar
Rstorm characteristics Example: daily forecast as an information chart
X Select the ® symbol in the main function
Rareas of high-pressure/low-pressure,
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
weather fronts
Rcourse of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,
typhoons)
Rwind direction and speeds
Selecting the area for the weather forecast 259
COMAND controller and pressing W to Switching off

confirm.
The SIRIUS Weather basic display appears. X Press the k back button.
X Confirm SIRIUS Weather by pressing W. or
The information chart shows the daily fore- X Select Back by turning cVd the COMAND
cast at the current vehicle position. controller and press W to confirm.
Both options appear in the SIRIUS Weather
You see the following information: basic display.
Rthe date and time of the weather message
received last
Rinformation on the current weather (tem- Displaying detailed information
perature, cloud cover) and forecast for the
next 3, 6, 12 hours
Rthe current highest temperature and fore-
cast
SIRIUS Weather
Rthe current lowest temperature and fore-
cast
Rthe probability of rain
Besides the current temperatures, you can

display information such as wind speeds and
UV index.
X Select Info in the information chart by
press W to confirm.
The information chart shows detailed infor-
Example: five-day forecast as an information chart
mation for the selected area.
X To switch to a five-day forecast: confirm
5-day by pressing W.
The information chart displays the forecast
for the next five days in the currently selec- Selecting the area for the weather
ted location. forecast
X To return to the current forecast: con- Introduction
firm Current by pressing W.
You can select the following areas:
Rthe current vehicle position
Rvicinity of the destination
Ra winter sports area
Ran area within the USA
You can select an area in the information
chart (option 1), on the map (option 2) or from
the memory. To select from the memory you
must first save an area (Y page 261).
260 Selecting the area for the weather forecast
i COMAND receives weather forecast data

from the nearest weather station at the
selected location.
Selecting the location in the informa-

tion chart
Selecting a state (searching for winter sport areas)

SIRIUS Weather
"Selecting the area for the weather forecast" menu

X Select Position in the information chart
A menu appears.
X To select a winter sports area: select In
X To select the current vehicle position:
Winter Sports Areas in the menu and
confirm Current Position in the menu by press W to confirm.
pressing W.
X Select a state, e.g. Colorado and press W
COMAND receives the weather data for the
to confirm.
current vehicle position from the nearest
X Select a winter sports area from the menu
weather station and displays it automati-
cally. and press W to confirm.
X To select the vicinity of the destination:
The weather data and other information is
displayed for the winter sports area that
select Near Destination in the menu by
has been selected. The data is supplied by
turning c V d the COMAND controller and
the nearest weather station.
press W to confirm.
The information chart shows the following
i You can select Near Destination once
information (if available):
a route has been calculated (Y page 69).
The menu item is otherwise grayed out. Rskislopes/ski lifts
Rsnowboarding and nighttime opening
Rsnow conditions (e.g. snow depth)
Rtemperature
Memory functions 261
Memory functions
Storing the area in the weather mem-
ory
For areas that are frequently called up, 10
presets (0 – 9) are available in the weather
memory.
X In the weather memory: select the area
for the weather forecast (Y page 259).
The selected area is shown at the top in the
Selecting a state (searching for an area) status bar.
X Select Position in the information chart
SIRIUS Weather
X Select Memory and press W to confirm.
X Select the preset by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
X Press and hold W the COMAND controller
The area is entered on the selected preset.
XTo store rapidly: in the daily forecast
X To search for a city: select a state, e.g. (Y page 258) press and hold a number key,
Florida and press W to confirm. e.g. l, until the preset position number
is shown in the status bar in front of the
X Select a city, e.g. Daytona Beach and
area name.
press W to confirm.
The information chart shows the weather i You can also use this function:
forecast for the selected area. The data is Rinthe five-day forecast (Y page 259)
supplied by the nearest weather station. Rinthe detailed information view
(Y page 259).
Selecting the location in the weather

map Selecting an area from the weather
X Call up the weather map (Y page 262). memory
X Move the weather map so that the cross- X From the weather memory: in the infor-
hair is over the desired area (Y page 262). mation chart, select Position by turning
X Press W the COMAND controller. cVd the COMAND controller and press W
The information chart shows the weather to confirm.
forecast for the selected area. The data is X Select Memory and press W to confirm.
supplied by the nearest weather station.
262 Weather map
X Select a preset that contains an entry by Changing the scale

turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND
The weather data for the selected area is
displayed.
X Rapid selection: if there is an entry avail-
able in the weather memory, e.g. when the
daily forecast is shown, briefly press a num-
ber key, such as l.
The weather data for the selected area is
displayed.
X As soon as you turn cVd the COMAND

Weather map controller, you see the scale bar.
SIRIUS Weather
Calling up the weather map X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
Showing/hiding the menu in the

weather map
Example: weather map

XSelect Map in the information chart by turn-
W to confirm.
The weather map is shown on a 500-mi or X To show: press W the COMAND controller
500-km scale. in the weather map.
i For the map display, you can activate the X To hide: slide up ZV the COMAND con-
topographic map style (Y page 112). troller.
Moving the weather map

controller.
The weather map moves in the correspond-
ing direction under the crosshair.
Weather map 263
Selecting a weather station in the

map
X Move the weather map and crosshair to the
desired position (Y page 262).
The menu is shown.
X Confirm Display Weather by pressing W.
COMAND receives the weather data for the
selected position from the nearest weather
station and displays it automatically as a
daily forecast.
Switching layers on the map on/off
SIRIUS Weather
You can switch on different layers, for exam-
ple to display the rain radar, weather fronts
and the course of tropical storms on the map.
X Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 262).
X Select Map Options by turning cVd the
firm.
A menu appears.
X Select the layer by turning cVd or sliding
to confirm.
Switch the display on O or off ª.
264 Weather map
Explanation of the layers on the weather map
Layer Map display Selectable

scales
Radar Map Shows the rain radar as a colored area on the map. All
For an explanation of the colors, see the legend
(Y page 267).
Storm Character‐ Shows the characteristics of a storm All
istics Characteristics are:
Rtornadic storm:
storm cell with strong winds (super cell), from
which a tornado can develop. Tornadoes are
also known as twisters.
SIRIUS Weather
Rcyclone:
storm cells from which a tornadic storm can
develop
Rhailstorm
Rthe likelihood of a hailstorm
Atmospheric Shows the position of high and low-pressure areas 200 miles
Pressure (H, L), weather fronts and isobars (200 km)
500 miles
(500 km)
Tropical Storm Shows the path/directional movement speed of a All
Tracks tropical storm with time and strength information
Winds Shows the wind direction and wind speed 5 miles (5 km)
Sample displays of weather data in Conditions: the Radar Map layer is active
the map (Y page 263) and weather data is available.
The precipitation radar legend can be called
up at (Y page 267).
Weather map showing the rain radar

Weather map 265
Displaying storm characteristics Example: weather map showing weather fronts

Conditions: the Storm Characteristics Conditions: the Atmospheric Pressure
layer is active (Y page 263) and weather data layer is switched on (Y page 263) and weather
is available. data is available.
SIRIUS Weather
The example shows hail showers and tornadic The example shows the position of high and
storms together with direction and speed of low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and
propagation. isobars.
The storms legend can be called up i Isobars are lines that show where the air
(Y page 267). pressure is the same.
Example: weather map with information on a Legend: weather fronts

cyclone
: Cold front (blue line with blue triangles)
controller and move the crosshair onto a ; Warm front (red line with red semi-circles)
corresponding symbol. = Stationary front (red-blue line with red
X Press W the COMAND controller. semi-circles and blue triangles)
The following information is shown (if availa- ? Occlusion (violet line with a violet semi-
ble): circle and triangles)
Rcharacteristicsof the storm cell
Rdate and time of observation (time stamp)
Rdirectional movement speed and path
i The directional movement speed is the

speed at which the storm cell moves.
266 Weather map
Weather Explanation
front
Cold front If a cold front moves in, the
weather remains changeable
and there are often rain show-
ers and thunderstorms. The
air temperature decreases.
Warm front This can mean longer periods
of rain and can lead to an
increase in cloud cover and a Information on a cyclone
slow increase in temperature.
You can select individual points (:, ; and
Stationary The weather front moves min- =) on the path and display further informa-
front imally. The weather remains tion on them.
SIRIUS Weather
changeable in this area. X In the map, slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the
Occlusion This occurs when a faster cold COMAND controller and slide the crosshair
front reaches an advancing to :, ; or =.
warm front and combines X Press W the COMAND controller.
with it. The weather remains Showing information (if available):
changeable and rainy within
Rname of the tropical storm and category
an occlusion.
Rtimestamp
Rspeed and direction of propagation (Wind
Wind)
Rmaximum wind speed (Max.
Max. Wind Speed)
Speed
i The directional movement speed is the
speed at which the storm cell of a tropical
storm moves.
A tropical storm is separated into different
categories according to the location at which
it develops.
Region of origin Category
Example: weather map showing the progress of a Atlantic, North and Tropical Low
tropical storm South Pacific Pressure System
: Position on the forecast path Oceans
; Current position of the cyclone
Atlantic, North and Tropical Rain
= Position on the previous path
South Pacific Zone
Conditions: the Tropical Storm Tracks Oceans
layer is switched on (Y page 263) and weather
data is available. Atlantic, North and Tropical Storm
South Pacific
A dotted line shows the previous path and the
Oceans
forecast path of a tropical low-pressure area
(cyclone).
Weather map 267
Region of origin Category Legend (precipitation radar and

storms)
Atlantic, North and Hurricane Cate‐
South Pacific gory 1 to Hurri‐
Oceans cane Category 5
Northwestern Tropical Low
Pacific Ocean Pressure System
Northwestern Tropical Cyclone
Pacific Ocean
Northwestern Typhoon
Pacific Ocean
Northwestern Super-Typhoon X Display the menu on the weather map
Pacific Ocean
SIRIUS Weather
(Y page 262).
firm.
X Select Legend and press W to confirm.
i The symbol for a tornadic storm is also

valid for a cyclone (mesocyclone).
Precipitation type Color scale
Rain Seven color levels
from light (light
green) to heavy (red)
Mixed Light (light violet) to
heavy (violet)
Snow Light (light tur-
quoise) to heavy
(turquoise)
Time stamp
You can also see the time stamp for the

weather data on map scales of 50 miles and
smaller.
The weather map shows wind directions and
wind speeds.
268 Weather map
The time stamp shows when the weather data

was created by the weather station.
A time stamp corresponds to the time at the
vehicle's current position. The changeover
from summer time to standard time is per-
formed automatically.
(Y page 262).
firm.
X Select Time Stamp and press W to con-
firm.
SIRIUS Weather
Changing to the information chart

(Y page 262).
X Select Display Weather and press W to
confirm.

2015 Command Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Command Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COMAND

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 19

Operating safety ................................. 14 System settings .................................. 41

Vehicle functions ................................ 49

Telephone .......................................... 123

Online and Internet functions .......... 157

Audio .................................................. 185

Video .................................................. 225

Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 235

SIRIUS Weather ................................ 257

1, 2, 3 ... AUX (audio)

Opening and selecting an entry ..... 140 COMAND

Entering a destination using the E

Mobile phone network providers Entering a destination ...................... 63

North orientation (navigation) ......... 109 Phone call

Daily forecast ................................. 258 T

Declarations of conformity i Roof antenna functionality (telephone,

A wide range of electronic components in

Rwitness statements XM Radio Inc.

RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-

Your COMAND equipment

This manual describes all standard and

For safety reasons, some COMAND functions

Your COMAND equipment .................. 20

Your COMAND equipment You can call up the main functions:

standard and optional equipment for your display

COMAND operating system

: COMAND display (Y page 21)

Navi Audio Telephone Video System Symbol ®

System menu overview

System Time SPLITVIEW Consump- Seat Display off

Switching the COMAND display on/off

COMAND control panel

Function Page Function Page

• Selects stations via the I Calls up the system menu 42

COMAND controller You can:

The COMAND controller can be: Back button

Seat function button

Using COMAND Selecting the menu of a main function

Address entry menu

Selecting a menu item Switching off navigation announce-

Switching navigation announcements

i Even if the sound is switched off, you will

X Turn the q control knob.

Adjusting the sound settings

Adjusting balance and fader

Equipped with Bang & Olufsen sound sys-

the $ button. sound engineer when the original was

X Call up the input menu with data fields Option 1

controller. The input menu shows the data field selec-

Other input menu functions: press W to confirm.

Switching data fields Changing the language of the character

X Select a language by turning cVd the

Switching the character bar to letters

Character entry (navigation)

: Character N entered by the user X Select E, W, space, Y in order and confirm

or If there are several entries for a city or if sev-

To do so, use the special cordless head- Switching SPLITVIEW on/off

longer. After this period, reactivation on the Transferring a destination to the

RTransfer Driver's Website

driver. the message: Accept the navigation

Your COMAND equipment .................. 42

Your COMAND equipment X Press W.